1 14612 Class 10 IT Revision Notes and Que Ans

SELF MANAGEMENT SKILLS II
REVISION NOTES
SELF MANAGEMENT SKILLS
Self Management Skills are those skills that help a person to control his thoughts, wants, feelings and
actions. It allows you to maximize your productivity and performance in various fields of your career.
When we talk about employability, Self-management skills help you to manage a good career path. It
helps you to overcome in many bad situations. Here in this article, we will discuss Stress and Stress
Management Techniques and also we will discuss how to work independently.
Following are some of the skills you must master to succeed in life:
 Self-awareness: Ask for honest feedback. Gather insights on your personality and work-specific
proficiencies. Think about your daily interactions and how you handled situations well or could
have handled them differently.
 Responsibility: Taking responsibility for your tasks is very important. Taking ownership is the
step towards self-development. For example, if you have been assigned a task by a teacher; ensure
you take complete ownership. Even if you are unable to complete the task on time, you must
report it and then correct it.
 Time Management: Prioritise the things you have to do. Remove waste and redundancy from
work. Make a time table and follow it diligently.
 Adaptability: Stay current with best practices and read up on new information always. Prepare
yourself for new changes, so that you can transition seamlessly.
What is Stress?
Stress can be defined as our emotional, mental, physical and social reaction to any perceived demands
or threats. These demands or threats are called stressors. Stressors are the reason for stress.
For example,
you are too close to the exams but feel unprepared.
you are experiencing a loss of someone close in the family.
you are worried about what people would think of you if you don t dress well or cannot speak
confidently.
Stress Management
Managing stress is about making a plan to be able to cope effectively with daily pressures. The
ultimate goal is to strike a balance between life, work, relationships, relaxation, and fun. By doing
this, you are able to deal with daily stress triggers and meet these challenges head-on.
Always keep in mind the ABC of stress management

A: Adversity or the stressful event
B: Beliefs or the way you respond to the event
C: Consequences or actions and outcomes of the event
Ability to Work Independently

If you can become a calm and relaxed person, you will have the ability to work independently, which
means.
1. becoming self-aware, self-monitoring, and self-correcting.
2. knowing what you need to do.
3. taking the initiative rather than being told what to do.
4. recognising your mistakes and not blaming others.
5. having the ability and the will to learn continuously.
Prepared by: M. S. KumarSwamy, TGT(Maths) Page - 1 -

Management Techniques
Here are a few simple stress management techniques.
 Time management: Proper time management is one of the most effective stress-relieving
techniques.
 Physical exercise and fresh air: A healthy lifestyle is essential for students. Stress is generally
lower in people who maintain a healthy routine. Doing yoga, meditation and deep breathing
exercises help in proper blood circulation and relaxes the body. Even taking a walk or playing in
the park will help you get a lot of fresh oxygen, which will help you become more active.
 Healthy diet: Having a healthy diet will also help you reduce stress. Eating a balanced diet, such
as Dal, Roti, vegetables and fruits will give you the strength to do your daily work efficiently.
 Positivity: Focussing on negative aspects of life will add more stress. Instead, learn to look at the
good things and stay positive. For example, instead of feeling upset over a scoring less in a test, try
to maintain a positive attitude and look at ways to improve the next time.
 Sleep: We should get a good night s sleep for at least 7 hours so that your brain and body gets
recharged to function better the next day.
 Holidays with family and friends: Going to a relative s place, such as your grandparents house
or a new place during your summer vacations can help you break from the normal routine and
come back afresh.
Emotional Intelligence
Emotional intelligence is the ability to identify and manage one s own emotions, as well as the
emotions of others.
 Emotional awareness : the ability to identify and name one s own emotions.
 Harnessing emotions : the ability to harness and apply emotions to tasks like thinking and
problem solving.
 Managing emotions : the ability to regulate one s own emotions when necessary and help others
to do the same.
Some steps to manage emotional intelligence are as given below.

 Understand your emotions: Observe your behaviour and note the things you need to work on.
You can then work on the things you need to improve.
 Rationalise: Do not take decisions abruptly; be rational in your thinking.
 Practice: Do meditation and yoga to keep yourself calm.

Techniques for Identifying your Strengths and Weaknesses
Finding Strengths (or abilities)
 Think of anything that you are always successful at.
 Think about what others like in you.
 Take out time and think about what you do well.
Finding Weaknesses
 Point out the areas where you struggle and the things you find difficult to do.
 Look at the feedback others usually give you.
 Be open to feedback and accept your weaknesses without feeling low about it. Take it as an
area of improvement.
Difference between Interests and Abilities (Strengths)

Interests
1. Things that you like to do in your free time that make you happy. An acquired or natural
capacity
2. Things you are curious about or would do even if no one asked you to do it.
3. Things you want to learn or would like to do in the future
Ability
1. An acquired or natural capacity
2. Enable you to perform a particular job or task with considerable proficiency.
Self-motivation
Self-motivation is simply the force within you that drives you to do things. Self-motivation is what
pushes us to achieve our goals, feel happy and improve our quality of life. In other words, it is our
ability to do the things that need to be done without someone or something influencing us.
Types of Motivation
Internal Motivation We do things because they make us happy, healthy and feel good. For
example, when you perform on your annual day function and you learn something new, such as
dancing, singing, etc., you feel good.
External Motivation We do things because they give us respect, recognition and appreciation. For
example, Suresh participated in a 100m race and won a prize. This motivated him to go for practice
every morning.
Qualities of Self-motivated People

1. Know what they want from life
2. Are focussed
3. Know what is important
4. Are dedicated to fulfill their dreams
Building Self-motivation
 Find out your strengths
 Set and focus on your goals

 Develop a plan
 to achieve your goals
 Stay loyal to your goals
Goals: They are a set of dreams with a deadline to get them, for example, saving pocket money to
buy a favourite mobile phone by a particular date.
Goal setting: It is all about finding and listing your goals and then planning on how to achieve them.
How to Set Goals?

We can use SMART method to set goals. SMART stands for:
Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Realistic and Time Bound
Specific : A specific and clear goal answers six questions. Who is involved in the goal? What do I
want to do? Where do I start? When do I start and finish? Which means do I use? Why am I doing
this?
Not a specific goal: I would learn to speak English.
Specific goal: I would learn to speak English fluently by joining coaching classes after my
school everyday, and in six months I will take part in the inter-school debate competition.
Measureable : A measureable goal answers the questions How much? , How many? and How
do I know that I have achieved results?
Not measurable goal: I want to be rich.
Measurable goal: I want to have 5 times more money than what I have today in my hand at the end
of this year.
Achievable : Breaking down big goals into smaller parts will make the goal achievable. Bigger Goal:
I want to become a teacher in my school.
Realistic : A realistic goal would be something that we want to achieve and can work towards.
Example of unrealistic goal: I will read my entire year s syllabus in one day and get good marks.
Realistic goal: I spend 3 hours every day of the year after school to revise my subjects to get good
marks in the exams.

Time bound : A SMART goal should have a timeframe by when the goal needs to be achieved.
This encourages us to take actions to completely fulfill the goals.
Not a time bound goal: I want to lose 10 kg someday.
Time bound goal: I want to lose 10kg in the next 6 months.
TIME MANAGEMENT AND ITS IMPORTANCE

Time management is the thinking skill that helps you to
complete tasks on time.
make a daily timetable.
make a good guess at how long it will take you to do something.
submit homework and assignments on time.
not waste time during the day.
Four Steps for Effective Time Management Organise

1.Organise: We plan our day today activities.
2.Pritortis: We make a to-do list that has all our activities and we rank them in the order of
importance.
3. Control: We have a control over our activities and time.
4. Track: We identify and note where we have spent our time.

SELF MANAGEMENT SKILLS II
OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS (SET 01)
1. Which of the following is not a self-management skill?

(a) Problem solving
(b) Bargaining
(c) Understanding self
(d) Confidence building
Answer: (b) Bargaining
2. Grooming is a term associated with

(a) time management
(b) problem solving
(c) neat and clean appearance
(d) self-management
Answer: (d) self-management
3. What steps should one take to build confidence?

(a) Set goals in life
(b) Appreciate oneself for all the achievements
(c) Always think positively
(d) Talk to people who are confident
Answer: (c) Always think positively
4. Which of the following is a quality of a self-confident person?

(a) Patient
(b) Compassionate
(c) Committed
(d) Passionate
Answer: (c) Committed
5. What is the best way to start our day positively?

(a) Think about all that can go wrong.
(b) Think about the difficult test you will face during the day.
(c) Think about all your accomplishment so far and feel good about it.
(d) Think about the traffic on the road and feel stressed.
Answer: (c) Think about all your accomplishment so far and feel good about it.
6. Rahul gets feedback on his project work from his class teacher. Which of these options
demonstrates positive attitude in this situation?
(a) Rahul ignores the feedback.
(b) Rahul takes the feedback but does not use it.
(c) Rahul tells others that the teacher is wrong.
(d) Rahul learns from the feedback and makes his project work better.
Answer: (d) Rahul learns from the feedback and makes his project work better.
7. What can you do to get rid of negative thoughts or feelings?

(a) Meditate to calm down and feel positive.
(b) Ignore them and move on in life.
(c) Act based on the negative thoughts or feelings.
(d) Talk to a friend and share all your negative feelings.

Answer: (a) Meditate to calm down and feel positive.
8. Do you think people living in hill stations can skip taking a bath for many days?
(a) No, irrespective of the climate, one should take a bath regularly.
(b) Yes, not taking bath for many days is acceptable for people staying in cold climate.
(c) Yes, if they wipe themselves with a wet cloth, then it is fine.
(d) None of the above
Answer: (a) No, irrespective of the climate, one should take a bath regularly.
9. Radha wants to grow her hair and she applies a lot of hair oil. She does not wash her hair for days
and sometimes it smells bad too. What would be your suggestion to her?
(a) She can leave the oil in her hair, after all it helps her hair to grow.
(b) She can leave it on at night and wash her hair every day before leaving home.
(c) She should not apply the oil at all.
(d) She can apply the oil and pour a little water on her hair before leaving home to reduce the smell.
Answer: (b) She can leave it on at night and wash her hair every day before leaving home.
10. Dressing and grooming are important because they help us to look_____________________.
(a) smart
(b) untidy
(c) shabby
(d) All of the above
Answer: (d) All of the above
11. The following image is an example of _____ shirt.
(a) informal
(b) formal
(c) Both of the above
Answer: (a) Formal
12. The following image is an example of _____ T-shirt.
(a) informal
(b) formal

Answer: (a) Formal
1. Self-management, also known as _________, is the ability to effectively control one s emotions,
behavior and thoughts.
a. Self control
b. Self innovative
c. Self Design
d. None of the above
Ans: a. Self control
2. Self management is also useful in:

a. Reaching your goals
b. Overcoming bad habits
c. Creating positive habits
d. All of the above
Ans: d. All of the above
3. _____________ term is also referred to self management.

a. Emotions, behavior and thoughts
b. Self regulation
c. Self control
d. All of the above
4. In self management skills you can improve yourself in various skills like __________.
a. Discipline
b. Timeliness
c. Goal-setting
d. All of the above
5. When you are under __________ for a prolonged period of time, it can cause health problems and
mental troubles as well.
a. Stress
b. Discipline
c. Timeliness
d. Goal Setting
Ans: a. Stress
6. Our emotional, mental, physical, and social responses to perceived demands or threats are referred
to as__________.
a. Stress
b. Blood pressure
c. Constipation
d. Heart attack
Ans: a. Stress
7. Stress can be defined as our mental , emotional, physical and social reaction to any perceived
demands or threats. These demands or threats are called ___________.
a. Blood pressure
b. Stress
c. Stressors
d. Constipation
Ans: c. Stressors
8. What is the reason for stress?

a. You are too close to the exams but feel unprepared.
b. You are stressed due to lack of sleep.
c. You are experiencing a loss of someone close in the family
d. All of the above
9. __________ management helps to balance between life, work, relationships, relaxation and fun.
a. Blood pressure management
b. Stress management
c. Stressors management
d. Constipation management
Ans: b. Stress management
10. How can we manage stress?

a. Be aware that you are stressed
b. Identify what is causing you stress
c. Apply stress management methods.
d. All of the above
11. What are the stress management techniques?

a. Time Management
b. Physical exercise and fresh air
c. Healthy diet
d. All of the above
12. If you can become a calm and relaxed person, you will have the ability to work independently,
which means.
a. You are self-aware
b. You are self monitor
c. You are self correcting
d. All of the above
13. How many types of skills are there in emotional intelligence?

a. Emotional awareness
b. Harnessing emotions
c. Managing emotions
d. All of the above
14. What are the steps to manage emotional intelligence?

a. Understand your emotions
b. Rationalize
c. Practise
d. All of the above
15. Analyzing your ________ and ________ helps you to attain success in life.
a. Strengths & Weakness
b. Good & bad habits
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: a. Strengths & Weakness
16. How can you identify your strength?

a. Think of anything that you are always successful at.
b. Think about what others like in you.
c. Take out time and think about what you do well.
d. All of the above
17. How can you identify your weaknesses?

a. Point out the areas where you struggle and the things you find difficult to do.
b. Look at the feedback others usually give you.
c. Be open to feedback and accept your weaknesses without feeling low about it.
d. All of the above
18. Identifying strengths

a. Take time off to think about what you do well
b. Think of anything that you are always good at
c. Think about what others appreciate about you
d. All of the above
19. Identifying weaknesses

a. Point out the areas where you struggle and what you find difficult to do
b. Look at the feedback you receive from others
c. Be open to feedback and accept your weaknesses
d. All of the above
20. If you are aware of your own values, likes, dislikes, strengths, and shortcomings as an individual.
It denotes the fact that you are ____________.
a. Self-Confident
b. Self-Control
c. Self Motivated
d. Self-Aware
Ans: d. Self-Aware
21. A person s _____________ is an acquired or natural ability that allows them to execute a specific
job or task with a high level of proficiency.
a. Weaknesses
b. Strength
c. Interest
d. Abilities
Ans: d. Abilities

22. ________, often known as areas for improvement , refers to the things we don t do well or aren t
very good at.
a. Weaknesses
b. Strength
c. Interest
d. Abilities
Ans: a. Weaknesses
23. _________ helps to achieve our goals, feel happy and improve our quality of life.
a. Self control
b. Self motivation
c. Self awareness
Ans: b. Self motivation
24. What are the different types of motivation?

a. Internal Motivation (Love)
b. External Motivation (Reward)
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: c. Both a) and b)
25. What are the qualities of self-motivated people?

a. Know what they want from life
b. Are focused
c. Know what is important
d. All of the above
26. What makes you complete work or studies without others cheering you?
a. Self-confidence
b. Communication
c. Self-motivation
d. Self-esteem
Ans: c. Self-motivation
27. Ravi works hard to get the best student award at the end of year. What type of motivation is this?
a. Internal
b. External
c. Both internal and external
d. Not any specific type of motivation
Ans: c. Both internal and external
28. _________ is all about finding and listing your goals and then planning on how to achieve them.
a. Goal setting
b. Internal setting
c. External setting
Ans: a. Goal setting
29. What are the smart methods to set goals in self management skills?
a. Specific & Measurable
b. Achievable & Realistic
c. Time bound
d. All of the above
30. ______________ is the ability to plan and control how you spend the hours of your day well and
do all that you want to do.
a. Stress Management
b. Time Management
c. Goal Setting
Ans: b. Time Management
31. What different examples of time management?

a. Complete tasks on time
b. Make a daily timetable
c. Submit homework and assignments on time
d. All of the above
1. Self-management is also referred to as __________.

a. Self-Control
b. Self-Awareness
c. Self-Motivation
d. None of these
Answer: a. Self-control
2. _________ is the ability to control one s emotions, thoughts, and behavior effectively in different
situations.
a. Self-guided
b. Self-Awareness
c. Self-Motivation
d. Self-management
Answer: d. Self-management
3. People with strong ___________ skills are better in doing certain things better than others.
a. Self-guided
b. Self-Awareness
c. Self-Motivation
d. Self-management
Answer: d. Self-management
4. Employers too strongly prefer people with good self-management skills.

a. True
b. False
Answer: a. True
5. To perform well at work and in life in general, you must be able to manage and improve
__________ skills.
a. discipline and timeliness
b. goal-setting & problem-solving
c. teamwork and professionalism
d. All of these
Answer: d. All of these
6. Gathering insights on your personality, work-specific proficiencies, and knowing about your
situation-handling skills is called ________.
a. Self-awareness
b. Responsibility
c. Time Management
d. Adaptability
Answer: a. Self-awareness
7. If you have been assigned a task by a teacher; ensure you take complete ownership. Even if you are
unable to complete the task on time, you must report it and then correct it. This skill is known as
__________.
a. Self-awareness
b. Responsibility
c. Time Management
d. Adaptability
Answer: b. Responsibility
8. Sumit is making his timetable and following it diligently as well as he is removing the waste and
redundancy from work. This skill is known as
a. Self-awareness
b. Responsibility
c. Time Management
d. Adaptability
Answer: c. Time Management
9. Stay current with best practices and read up on new information always. Prepare yourself for new
changes, so that you can transition seamlessly. This skill is known as __________
a. Self-awareness
b. Responsibility
c. Time Management
d. Adaptability
Answer: d. Adaptability
10. Stress can be defined as our _______________ reaction to any perceived demands or threats.
a. emotional,
b. mental,
c. physical and social
d. all of these
Answer: d. all of these
11. ______ are the reason for stress?

a. Demands
b. Threats
c. Stressors
d. None of these
Answer: c. Stressors
12. Which of the following is not a stressor?

a. you are too close to the exams but feel unprepared
b. you are experiencing the loss of someone close in the family
c. you are stressed due to lack of sleep
d. None of these
Answer: d. None of these
13. ________ is one of the important reasons for low productivity in all stages of life.
a. Stress
b. Threats
c. Stressors
d. None of these
Answer: a. Stress
14. Stress drains one s _____ and impedes the day-to-day work and peace of mind.
a. happiness
b. sorrow
c. energy
d. None of these
Answer: c. energy
15. Stress can be a ______ stress, if taken in the right sense, and may help in achieving effective
outcomes.
a. positive/good/eustress
b. negative/bad/distress
c. neutral
d. None of these
Answer: a. positive/ good/eustress
16. A _____ stress that makes a person worrisome, less productive, and may lead to various
psychosomatic disorders too.
a. positive/good/eustress,
b. negative/bad/distress
c. neutral
d. None of these
Answer: b. negative / bad / distress
17. Stress has always had a bad effect.

a. True
b. False
Answer: b. False
18. Ravi was extremely excited to break the good news to his mother of his winning the highest
amount of scholarship. This is an example of ________.
a. Stress
b. Eustress
c. Distress
d. Self-management
Answer: b. Eustress
19. ________ Management refers to focusing human efforts on maintaining a healthy body and mind
capable of better withstanding stressful situations.
a. Stress
b. Time
c. Money
d. Emotion
Answer: a. Stress
20. ________ stress is an unavoidable part of one s life.

a. Planned
b. Occasional
c. Behavior
d. Emotional
Answer: b. Occasional
21. _________ stress leads to anxiety and sorrow resulting in ill status of mental and physical health
a. Planned
b. Managed
c. Unmanaged
d. None of these
Answer: c. Unmanaged
22. Which of the following is/are known as Stress Casual Agents ?

a. Mental and Physical
b. Mental, Physical & Social
c. Mental, Physical, Social & Financial
d. None of these
Answer: c. Mental, Physical, Social & Financial
23. The ultimate goal of Stress Management is to strike a balance between life, work, relationships,
relaxation and _____.
a. fun
b. time
c. Both (a) and (b)
d. None of these.
Answer: a. fun
24. In the ABC of stress management, A stands for _____.

a. Adversity
b. Advice
c. Awareness
d. None of these.
Answer: a. Adversity
25. In the ABC of stress management, B stands for _____.

a. Balance
b. Beliefs
c. Beware
d. None of these.
Answer: b. Beliefs
26. In the ABC of stress management, C stands for ___________.

a. Consequences
b. Cooperate
c. Collaboration
d. None of these.
Answer: a. Consequences

27. Identify the Stress Casual Agent s.
Students can be left overwhelmed if they are unable to handle their assignment submission deadlines
and examinations grades.
a. Mental
b. Physical
c. Social
d. Financial.
Answer: a. Mental
28. Identify the Stress Casual Agents.

High expectations from self can leave one with chronic anxiety and stress, thus leading to _________
stress. [ CBSE SQP Term I 2021]
a. Mental
b. Physical
c. Social
d. Financial.
Answer: a. Mental
29. Identify the Stress Casual Agents.

As children grow up, they may seek more independence, may become critically conscious of their
looks and have to cope up with hormonal changes.
a. Mental
b. Physical
c. Social
d. Financial.
Answer: b. Physical

Issues related to general well-being and health of an individual can lead to low self-esteem and cause
stress.
a. Mental
b. Physical
c. Social
d. Financial.
Answer: b. Physical

Discord amongst family members, peer pressure for doing things that children would generally avoid,
maintaining balance in relationships amongst friends, and status show off may lead to stress at times.
This leading to ________ stress.
a. Mental
b. Physical
c. Social
d. Financial.
Answer: c. Social
32. Which of the following is NOT a physical sign of stress? [CBSE Sample Question Paper 2022]
a) Dry mouth
b) Guilt
c) Fatigue
d) Cold hands
Answer: (b) Guilt

33. Managing stress is about making a plan to be able to cope effectively with daily pressures.
Always keep in mind the ABC of stress management. The acronym ABC stands for _________ . [
CBSE Term I 2021]
a. Ability, Burden, Concise
b. Adore, Belief, Cause
c. Adversity, Beliefs, Consequences
d. Adapt, Balance, Cooperate
Answer: c. Adversity, Beliefs, Consequences
34. It refers to focusing human efforts for maintaining a healthy body and mind capable of better
withstanding stressful situations. [ CBSE SQP TERM 1 2021]
a. Stress Management
b. Exercise Management
c. Fitness Management
d. Personality management
Answer: a. Stress Management
35. Imagined, unreal threats affect us ________.

a. Psychologically
b. Physically
c. Both (a) and (b)
d. There is nothing as imagined, unreal threats.
Answer: c. Both (a) and (b)
36. Find the odd stress symptom of the following.

a. Social withdrawal
b. Depression
c. Fatigue
d. Anxiety
Answer: c. Fatigue
37. Find the odd stress symptom of the following.

a. Chest pain
b. Angry outburst
c. Headache
d. Low energy
Answer: b. Angry outburst
38. Impact of stress depends on _________.

a. Age and health
b. Profession
c. Living conditions
d. All of these
Answer: d. All of these
39. Sonika gets up at 6 am and goes to her hobby classes. Then she comes back home and finishes her
homework before going to school. She does all work by herself. No one tells her to do so. This is
called ___________.
a. Self-Awareness
b. Self-Motivation
c. Self-Regulation
d. Discipline
Answer: b. Self-Motivation
40. Ravi is suffering from insomnia due to noisy marketplace in his neighborhood. What remedy do
you suggest him?
a. Change of place
b. Go on a quieter place during vacations
c. Take medications for insomnia
d. Install sound proof windows and doors.
Answer: b. Go on a quieter place during vacations
QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS (SET 01)
1. What do you mean by Self management?

Ans. Self-management, also referred to as self-control, is the ability to control one s emotions,
thoughts and behavior effectively in different situations.
2. What is Stress?
Ans. Stress can be defined as our emotional, mental, physical and social reaction to any perceived
demands or threats.
3. Give any two examples where small amount of stress is helpful.

Ans. Two examples where small amount of stress is helpful are :
1. A fire alarm is intended to cause stress that alerts you to avoid danger.
2. The stress created by a deadline to finish a paper can motivate you to finish it on time.
4. Write the effects of stress on our life.

Ans. It can harm our emotional and physical health, and limit our ability to function well at home,
in school and within our relationships.
5. What is Stress management?

Ans. Stress management is managing stress by making a plan to be able to cope effectively with
daily pressures.
6. What are the benefits of Stress management?

Ans. Benefits of Stress management are :
1 We have a joyful life.
2. We will be more energetic and spend quality time with our friends and family.
3. We can complete our task on time
7. Write four sign/symptoms of stress.

Ans. Four Symptoms of stress management are :
a. Headache
b. Sleeplessness
c. Sadness
d. Excessive worrying
e. Nervousness
8. Name any four stress management techniques.

Ans. Four stress management techniques are :
a. Time management
b. Physical exercise and fresh air.
c. Healthy diet
d. Holidays with family and friends

9. Write four qualities of those person who work independently.
Ans. Four qualities are:
 They are self-aware, self-monitored and self-correcting.
 They take the initiative rather than being told what to do.
 They have the ability to learn continuously.
 They recognize their own mistakes.
10. What do you mean by emotional intelligence?

Ans. Emotional intelligence is the ability to identify and manage one s own emotions, as well as
the emotions of others.
11. Write three steps to manage emotional intelligence.

Ans. Three steps to manage emotional intelligence are :
1 Understand your emotions: Observe your behavior and then work on the things you need to
improve.
2. Rationalize: Do not take decisions abruptly; be rational in your thinking.
3. Practice: Do meditation and yoga to keep yourself calm.
12. What do you mean by Self awareness?

Ans. Self awareness means knowing your inner strengths, hidden talents, skills and even
weaknesses.
13. Differentiate between Interests and Abilities.

Ans.
Interests Abilities
Things that you like to do in your An acquired or natural capacity
free time that make you happy.
Things you are curious to do even if no one Enable you to perform a particular task
asked you to do it. with proficiency
14. What do you mean by Self motivation?

Ans. Self-motivation is an internal force that pushes us to achieve our goals, feel happy and
improve our quality of life.
15. Write four Qualities of Self-motivated people.

Ans. Four Qualities of Self-motivated People are:
1 They know what they want from life.
2. They are focused.
3. They know what is important for them.
4. They are dedicated to fulfill their dreams.
16. Write four steps of Self motivation.

Ans. Four steps of Self motivation are :
1 Find out your strengths.
2. Focus on your goals.
3. Develop a plan to achieve your goals.
4. Stay loyal to your goals.
17. What do you mean by Goal and Goal Setting?

Ans. Goals : They are a set of dreams with a deadline to get them, for example, saving pocket
money to buy a favorite mobile phone by a particular date.
Goal setting : It is all about finding and listing your goals and then planning on how to achieve
them
18. Ravi is using SMART method to set goals. What is SMART stands for?
Ans. SMART stands for :
Specific
Measurable
Achievable
Realistic
Time bound
19. What do you mean by Time management?

Ans. Time management is the ability to plan and control how you spend your day well and do all
that you want to do.
20. Write the four steps for effective Time management.

Ans. Four Steps for Effective Time Management are :
a. Organise : We should plan our day-to-day activities.
b. Pritortise We should make our to-do-list
c. Control : We should have a control over our activities and time.
d. Track: We should identify and note where we have spent our time.
21. What do you mean by self management skills?

Ans Your ability to regulate and control your actions, feelings, and thoughts is referred to as self-
management skills. It also helps to improve personal and academic goals.
Self-management can also helps in the following areas:-
 Reaching your goals
 Developing good habits
 Overcoming challenges and difficulties
 Overcoming bad habits
22. What are the different practices of self management skills?

Ans: Self management skills are
a. Self awareness Ability to control your values, likes, strengths, dislikes and weaknesses, etc.
b. Self control Holding the ability to control your behavior, discipline, and so on.
c. Self confidence Believe in yourself and don t be scared to take risks.
d. Problem solving Understanding a problem and finding the solution.
e. Self motivation Try to complete your tasks without any external help.
f. Personal hygiene Be healthy, clean and smart
g. Positive thinking Expressing certainty or affirmation even in tough situations
h. Teamwork Work in team to complete the goals
i. Time management According to your plan, achieve the task on time.
j. Goal setting Plan and accomplish the goals within a timeframe.
23. Write a short note on the factors influencing self management.

Ans: Factors influencing the self management are patients, cognitive, mental, and behavioral
ability to identify disease related symptoms, seek treatment, and to identify physical,
psychological and social changes.
24. Write Self management skills strengths and weaknesses?

Ans: Self management skills strengths and weaknesses
Strengths
 Think that you are always good at
 Think about what you do well
 Think about what others appreciate about you
Weaknesses
 Identify the areas where you struggle and what you find difficult to do
 Accept the feedback you receive from others
 Be positive with feedback and try to improve yourself.
25. Write difference between interests and abilities?

Ans: Interests are the things that we enjoy doing ability acquired or natural capacity that enable
an individual to perform a particular task with considerable proficiency.
Interest may include
Activities you like most to do at school or at home that make you happy.
Even if no one asks you to do the activity but you want to do it.
Activities that you like to learn or do in the future.
26. Write the Qualities of self confidence?

Ans: Qualities of self confident people
a. Self belief Always believe in yourself and respect the failures, make you successful in life.
b. Hard Work Work hard to achieve the goal, don t be afraid of failures.
c. Positive Attitude Positive attitude means focusing on the goal and trying to achieve.
27. How to build self confidence?

Ans: There are three steps to build self confidence are as follows
a. Step 1: Appreciate achievements & accept failures.
b. Step 2: Make a goal and try to achieve.
c. Step 3: Always look on the positive side and be happy.
28. What are the factors that decrease self confidence?

Ans: Some of the factors which decrease self confidence
 When we think we are unable to complete a task.
 When you feel bad from the past mistakes, and unmotivated.
 After failure in the first attempt, do not try again to achieve the goal.
 When we are surrounded by people who have negative thoughts.
1. What is Self-Management?
Answer : Self-Management refers to management of or by oneself; taking of responsibility for one s
own behavior and well-being.
It also means managing yourself with the people and resources around you.
2. What is the aim of Self-Management person?

Answer : The aims of Self-Management person are conducting oneself for the greater good of the
individual, family and the society.
3. Write the qualities of Self-Management person.

Answer : The qualities of Self-Management person are :-
(a) Self-managed person not only manages himself well but also behaves responsibly towards people
around.
(b) Self- Management is needed by everyone around us and it is needed in all stages and walks of life.
(c) Self-managed person is like a tree who is taking care of itself and is also helping others to lead a
comfortable life.
4. What are the reasons for promotion of Self-Management person.

Answer : The reasons behind promotion of self-management are as follows:
(a) Don t want the individual to be dependent on anybody else.
(b) to instills self-confidence in individual to deal his or her life
(c) to provides a long term and sustainable mechanism of handling personal life.
5. How is Self-Management exhibited?

Answer : Self-management is exhibited by our habits, manners, knowledge, intentions and our deeds.
6. How good habit is useful?

Answer : Good habits like brushing teeth, taking bath, eating balanced diet and getting up and
sleeping at right time every day, helps us maintain good health and physique.
7. How good knowledge is useful?

Answer : Good knowledge acquisition and learning increases self-esteem and develops an inquisitive
mindset and curious approach.
8. How good intentions are useful?

Answer : Good intentions guide us to do the right things. They help us identify the right path and
right approach to handle situations.
9. How a good deed is useful?

Answer : A good deed done to help others is worth more than a million good words spoken.
10. What are the environmental forces for students?

Answer : Environmental forces for students can be the class schedule, assignments, competitions,
exams, different students and their behavior.
11. What are the benefits of principles of self-management for students?

Answer : Benefits of principle of self-management are
(a) It guides individuals to self-monitor their conduct and behavior.
(b) It helps in self-evaluation.
(c) It leads to self reinforcement of positive behavior.
12. What do you mean by self-monitor?

Answer : Self-monitor means, individual can monitor their conduct and behavior. It makes them pro-
active. It prepares individuals to complete task independently. Instill ownership to the task and the
consequences amongst individuals.
13. What do you mean by self-evaluation?

Answer : Self-evaluation means, individual can do course correction by themselves if they do not get
desired goals. Once the goals are achieved as desired, it also motivates individuals.
14. What do you mean by self-reinforcement?

Answer : Self-reinforcement means appropriate behavior of students as per the time, situation and
people involved. Self-reinforcement motivates individuals to take up right things and refrains from
getting indulged into negative things, keeping long term consequences in focus.
15. What are the different types of self-management skills?

Answer : Following are the self-management skills that individuals should possess to enjoy the fruits
of self-management.
(a) Self-confidence
(b) Stress Management
(c) Independent Working
(d) Team Player
(e) Time Management
(f) Self-motivation
(g) Personality management
16. What is Self-confidence?

Answer : Self-confidence refers to trusting one capabilities and potentialities to achieve the necessary
goals, objectives and challenges in life and being worthy of leading a happy life.
17. What do you mean by stress management?

Answer : Stress management refers to a state of psychological tension and discomfort originating
from unforeseen, difficult, confusing and challenging situations.
18. What do you mean by Independent Working?

Answer : When an individual is assigned a task(s), he/she takes ownership and doesn t require
constant assistance or supervision to complete that task(s). This is called Independence working.
19. Who is known as Team player?

Answer : A person who conforms well with norms of a team and contributes to the attainment of the
common goals in an efficient and effective way is called as a team player.
20. Who is Time Management?

Answer : Time Management is conscious effort to prioritize task according to the time at hand to
increase productivity, efficiency and effectiveness.
21. What is Self-Motivation?

Answer : Motivation is defined as a driving force responsible to do something. The students who are
motivated to achieve their academic goal, their future is much better than others. This is called Self-
motivation.
22. What is Personality management?

Answer : General neatness, grooming, appropriate dressing, apt verbal and non-verbal
communication are components of good personality. It is called personality management.
23. What is Self-Confidence?

Answer : General neatness, grooming, appropriate dressing, apt verbal and non-verbal
communication are components of good personality. It is called personality management.
24. Who guide the person in day to day life?

Answer : Generally Parents, teachers and guardians are guide them. But in absence of them, principle
of self-management guide the individual day in and day out, on how to respond to the environmental
forces.

ICT SKILLS II
REVISION NOTES
ICT skills help us to communicate, run our business and stay connected with our family and friends.
Hence, every person needs to acquire ICT skills and build them to stay updated with the latest
software and applications (apps).
COMPUTER HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
A computer system consists of two main parts

Hardware- The physical parts that we can see and touch are called hardware. It is the machinery of a
computer. These are the keyboard, monitor, CPU, etc.
Software: The part which cannot be seen but it makes hardware to work. Example: Windows, MS
office etc.
OPERATING SYSTEM
An operating interface between user and computer which directs the processing of programmes and
controls the operation of computer.
Some of the functions of Operating system are:
 It supervises all the hardware on a computer and monitors each device s status, including
whether it s in use or not.
 It also checks whether the device is functioning properly or not.
 It also controls software resources of the computer.
 It controls how much memory is used by the computer, keeping track of which memory is free
and which memory is being used by which software.
 It controls how a computer system s files and directories are organized.
 It keeps track of the amount of disk space used by a specific file.
 It allows you to create, copy, move and delete files.
Types of Operating Systems

The different types of operating systems are as follows:
Single-user , single-task operating system This kind of operating system only permits one person
to use the computer at a time for one job.
Single-user, multi-task operating system This kind of operating system is used on desktop and
laptop computers, which allow one user to run multiple programmes simultaneously. Examples of
single-user multitask operating systems are Windows and Apple MacOS.
Multi-user A multi-user operating system enables multiple users to work on the same computer at
different times or simultaneously.
Real Time A computing environment that responds to input within a specific period of time. is
known as a real-time operating system. It controls the computer s resources so that each operation is
completed in exactly the same amount of time each time. Real-time operating systems include Lynx
OS and Windows CE.
Distributed A distributed operating system runs on a set of computers that are interconnected by a
network. It combines the different computers in the network into a single integrated computer and
storage location. Windows, UNIX, and LINUX are examples of distributed operating systems.
Interactive (GUI-based) An operating system that is user-friendly has a graphical user interface
where commands can be entered by clicking, double-clicking, or right-clicking the mouse. Windows
is the example of Interactive Operating System.

MENU, ICONS, AND TASK BAR ON THE DESKTOP
The components of Windows are as follows
Taskbar The long horizontal bar at the bottom of the screen is called the taskbar. The Start button
is located to the left of the Taskbar, and Date/Time is located to the right. On the Taskbar, you can
also see icons for open programmes and a few shortcuts.
Start button It is located on the left of the taskbar. Clicking the Start button opens the Start menu
and provides access to programs and features.
Recycle Bin The user s deleted files and folders are kept in the Recycle Bin. You can restore
accidentally deleted files or folders from the recycle bin.
CREATING AND MANAGING FILES AND FOLDERS
Files Every single thing you keep on your computer is kept as a file. A file system is a method for
naming, storing, and retrieving files.
Creating File
1. Right-click anywhere in the blank area of the right-column.
2. In the Shortcut menu, click New and select the type of the file you want to create.
Renaming folders and files

1. Right-click the file or the folder.
2. From the shortcut menu, select Rename option.
3. Type the new name or edit the existing name and press the Enter key.
4. Or Just select the file/folder and press Function key F2.
5. Right-click anywhere in the blank area of the right-column.
6. In the Shortcut menu, click New and select the type of the file you want to create.
Folder Folders and directories are groups which contain single of multiple files. There may be
related files and/or subfolders in each directory and folder. One or more files and other sub-folders
may be located inside a sub-folder. This makes files easily accessible.
Creating Folder
1. Double-click the Computer icon.
2. Select the drive in which you want to create a new folder. Say, Local Disk D:.
3. Window will open up showing files and folders in Local Disc D:
4. Click New Folder on the toolbar
5. A new folder is created with name New Folder highlighted.
6. Type a name for the folderCreating a file
Renaming folders and files
1. Right-click the file or the folder.
2. From the shortcut menu, select Rename option.
3. Type the new name or edit the existing name and press the Enter key.
4. Or Just select the file/folder and press Function key F2.
Deleting files or folders
1. Click the file or the folder.
2. Press the Delete key.
3. Or Right-click and select Delete option from the Shortcut menu.
BASIC SHORTCUTS
CTRL+ z undo
CTRL+ y redo
CTRL+ a select all
CTRL+ x cut
CTRL+ c copy
CTRL+ v paste
CTRL+ p print
CTRL+ s save.
APPLY BASIC SKILLS FOR CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF COMPUTER

Computer systems require maintenance in order to function properly. System failure may result from
poor maintenance. You may be able to keep it in good working order by giving it routine care and
maintenance. Installing updates, security, creating backups, and scanning are all part of routine
system maintenance.
To keep the computer system s maintained you should follow the following activity
1. Keep the computer dust free.
2. Do not eat or drink while working on the computer. Food or drink may spill on the
system.
3. To keep the keyboard clean, make sure your hands are clean before using it.
4. CDs and DVDs should be handled carefully so that it does not get any scratches.
5. Keep keyboard covered when not in use.
CLEANING THE COMPUTER COMPONENTS

Computer components needs proper care to last longer. Preventive maintenance increases the life of
the components.
General precautions to be taken while cleaning the computer components are:
 Always Power Off the computer system before cleaning.
 Never spray cleaning fluid directly on the component of the computer. First spray the
liquid on the cloth and then wipe the component.
 Do not allow the cleaning liquid to drip near the circuit board.
 Preferably use anti-static wrist band which helps to prevent building up of static
electricity near electronic device.
Computer monitor
To clean the computer monitor, you can use a soft lint-free cloth, like cotton and water or special
cleaning liquid. You should not spray water or cleaning liquid directly on the computer monitor as it
may run through the seams.
Keyboard
The keyboard might be harmed by dirt and dust. If dirt gets inside the keyboard s keys, the keys could
not work properly. Every now and then, move the keyboard while holding it upside-down to clean it.
Optical Mouse
With a clean, lint-free cloth, you can clean the optical mouse s bottom. Air or a cotton swab can be
used to clean the lens region.
Digital camera
Never touch the camera s lens. You can use a soft lens brush or a soft, dry cloth to remove the dust.
You can use a special lens cleaning solution to remove tenacious dust, but first you should apply it to
a tissue before wiping the lens. Never spray fluid over the lens directly.
CDs and DVDs
Keep CD/DVD in proper case to prevent damage. If there is some dirt on the CD or DVD, it may not
work at all. Finger prints and dirt can be removed by lightly rubbing with a clean lint-free cotton
cloth.
PREPARING MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Regular maintenance of the computer system is very important.
Some of the maintenance activities are:
 Keep the components of the computer, like keyboard, mouse, monitor, etc. clean.
 Replace hardware that is not functioning properly
 Keep food items away from the computer

 Cables and chords should not be messed up
 Removing unauthorized software from the computer
 Take regular backup of the data
 Ensure backups are working properly by periodically restoring or checking of data.
You should use external hard drive for backup of data on your computer.
 Run anti-virus periodically
 Keep anti-virus software up to date
 Do not overcharge the batteries
 Do not block the vents
 Always shut down the computer properly
PROTECTING COMPUTER AGAINST VIRUSES

An Illegal programme known as a computer virus attaches to other programmes and modifies their
behaviour. A virus might or might not cause harm. Some viruses damage computer programmes or
delete data. Vital Information Resource Under Seize is referred to as VIRUS.
A computer can get infected with virus in any of the following ways:
 Infected files
 Infected pen drives
 Infected CD-ROMs/DVD-ROMs
 Through infected file attachment of e-mails
A computer virus cannot do the following:
 It cannot infect files on CD or DVD, if they are closed for writing.
 It cannot infect computer hardware like, keyboard, mouse, etc.
How do we know that our computer is infected with virus?
 Computer runs very slow
 There is change in the file size
 Computer often stops responding
 There is an increase in number of files (unusual)
 Unusual error message appears on the screen
 Computer restarts on its own
Scanning and cleaning viruses and removing SPAM files, temporary files and folders
 Install and use anti-virus software.
 Keep anti-virus software updated.
 Scan all the files that you download from the Internet
 Do not open e-mails of an unknown person/sender
 Don t allow any untrustworthy person to use your system.
 New use unknown pen drive/CD on your computer
 Never click on the windows that pop-up when you are surfing the Internet.
Preparing computer against virus
For an anti-virus program to be work effective do the following:
 It needs to run in the background at all times.
 Keep the anti-virus software updated so that it can recognize new viruses.
 Run full disk scans periodically.
REMOVING TEMPORARY FILES

When you use computer programmes, temporary files are created automatically. A TMP file is also
known as Temporary file and it is created in the Microsoft Windows and Windows apps. Web
browsers also create temporary files to store your browsing history.
1. Double-click Computer icon on the desktop.
2. The Computer Window opens.
3. Right-click Local Disk C: and select Properties option from the Shortcut menu
4. The Properties window opens. Click Disk Cleanup.
5. The Disk Cleanup for C: window appears
6. Click the Check box next to Temporary Files, Temporary Internet files, etc. that you
want to delete.
7. Click OK.
8. A confirmation message will appear
9. Click Delete Files.
10. Windows will delete all the temporary files on the computer.
REMOVING FILES OF TEMPORARY FOLDER

1. Press Windows button + R on the keyboard.
2. The Run dialog box appears.
3. Type %temp%
4. The Temp folder opens Click Ctrl + A to select all the files in the folder. Press Delete
key.
5. A message box appears. Click Yes to confirm.
FIREWALL
A computer firewall is a network security system, software, or programmable device that monitors
and regulates incoming and outgoing network traffic in accordance with user-defined security rules.
Computers connected to a network, such as a LAN or the Internet, are more securely protected by
firewalls. Typically, a firewall creates a wall between a trusted internal network and an unreliable
external network, like the Internet. Each packet of data, whether it is coming in or going out, is
examined by the firewall, which then decides whether it should be permitted to pass or stopped.
COOKIES
When you visit an internet website, a user s computer stores a little file known as a cookie on it.
These files are used to store information personal to a given client and website.
A cookie is sent by a website when you visit it and is saved on your computer in a file. A cookie can
only be read by the website that created it. This information cannot be accessed by other servers.
BASIC TIPS FOR TAKING CARE OF DEVICES
(i) Keyboard: You can clean a keyboard with a soft brush

(ii) Screen: You can wipe the screen with a soft cloth to remove any finger marks.
(iii) Handle devices carefully: Handle and move your laptop carefully and avoid dropping or
banging it against a hard surface.
(v) Keep the computer cool: If a computer, laptop or mobile device gets overheated, the internal
parts can be damaged. The CPU has an internal fan to keep it cool. We should make sure the fan is
functioning.
(vi) Do not overcharge your battery: Sometimes we keep a device plugged in for charging even
after it is fully charged.This reduces the battery life. Always unplug the device once it
is charged 100%.
(vii) Always plug in devices carefully: Any device being connected to a laptop or computer such as
a USB drive or headphones, should be done gently. It should not be forced into the port.
(viii) Do not run too many programs at a time: When too many programs are running at the same
time, the computer can become slow and even crash.
PREPARE A MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(a) Daily Maintenance

i. Clean up your e-mail inbox
ii. Download e-mail attachments and save in proper folders
(b) Weekly Maintenance

i. Clean your keyboard
ii. Clean your monitor
iii. Dust CPU and printer
iv. Backup your data to an external drive
(c) Monthly Maintenance

i. Transfer photographs to computer and delete from drive
ii. Organise photos into folders or albums
iii. Clean up Download folder
iv. Uninstall unused programs and apps
v. Run disk-cleaner software
vi. Run full system virus scan
(d) Yearly/Annual Maintenance

(i) Clean up contacts list on social media accounts
(ii) Clean up e-mail contact list
(iii) Update your operating system
(iv) Check for expiry of anti-virus software and renew
BACKUP YOUR DATA

Backing up data means to save the information present on your computer on another device, such as
CD/DVD drives Data can recovered from here in case the computer stops working completely.
Computers can crash, humans can make mistakes and natural disasters, such as floods can happen
Scanning and Cleaning Viruses

Sometimes computer viruses can enter a computer from such attacks we can install anti-virus
software. This will prevent any viruses from entering and will also clean any viruses that may enter
our system before they affect the data.
Increasing Computer Performance

If we have been using a computer for a long time we
have a lot of unnecessary files and data, such as temporary files and images. When they use too much
hard-disk space, the performance of the computer goes down. It is important that we keep cleaning by
removing any extra files.
Removing SPAM from your Computer

Sometimes we get emails from companies who are advertising a product or trying to
attract you to their website. Such mails are called SPAM. We should never respond to SPAM and
delete it on a regular basis.
THREATS TO COMPUTER
Threats are the ways in which personal information can be leaked from a computer without our
knowledge.
(a) Theft: Theft means stealing of information or hardware. These may be of three types:
Physical: Where a person may steal your desktop computer or laptop.
Identity: Where a hacker steals your personal information and assumes your identity. Using this
false identity, the hacker can gain access to your account information or perform illegal activity.
Software Piracy: This is stealing of software and includes using or distributing unlicensed and
unauthorised copies of a computer program or software.
(b) Virus: Viruses are computer programs that can damage the data and software programs or steal
the information stored on a computer. Major types of viruses are Worms and Trojan Horse.
Worms: These are viruses that replicate themselves and spread to all files once they
Information and Communication Technology Skills 81 attack a computer. This makes it very difficult
to remove them.
Trojan Horse: A Trojan Horse disguises itself i.e., it appears to be a useful software program but
once it reaches a computer it starts behaving like a virus and destroying data.
Online Predator: Online predators are people who trap you into inappropriate relationships.
They may be older people posing to be your age, bullying you into doing illegal activities
online and sometimes face to face.
Internet Scams: Sometimes you may receive very attractive offers saying you have won huge
money in a lottery and that you can claim the prize by depositing a certain amount of money. When
you deposit the money using credit card or online banking, you not only lose the deposit money but
your card/account information may be misused later.
PROTECTING YOUR DATA
(a) Use passwords to login to your computer: Use passwords that are difficult to guess. Passwords
are difficult to hack if they are a mix of small (For example a b c d ) and capital letters (For example,
H J E R ), numbers (For example 8 7 6 5 ) and special characters
(For example, % ^ # $ ). This would prevent unauthorised people from using your computer.
(b) Install Anti-virus and Firewall: Anti-viruses and Firewall monitor the data coming in and out of
a computer and prevent and viruses from entering. Anti-viruses can also detect and clean viruses that
may have entered a computer.
(c) Encrypt Data: This is usually done by banks and companies in which important customer
information is stored. They can encrypt their entire hard disk using the encrypting feature in Windows
(Bitlocker). This would force users to use a decryption password (or key) before starting the computer
thus preventing unauthorised usage.
(d) Secure sites: Give details of your credit card or bank account only on secure sites. See in the
address bar of the browser. If the site address starts with https://and a lock symbol, then it is safe to
give your credit card and bank details.

ICT SKILLS II
OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
1. An _______ is a software that serves as an interface between the user and the computer.
a. operating system
b. application software
c. anti-virus software
d. microsoft word
Answer: a. operating system
2. Which software manages all the devices of a computer and keeps track of the status of the device,
whether it is busy or not?
a. operating system
d. microsoft word
3. Which software checks whether the device is functioning properly or not?

a. operating system
d. microsoft word
4. Which software controls software resources of the computer?

a. operating system
d. microsoft word
5. An ________ manages the computer memory and keeps track of which memory space is in use by
which program and which space is free.
a. operating system
d. microsoft word
6. An ________ manages the computer memory and keeps track of which memory space is in use by
which program and which space is free.
a. operating system
d. disk defragmentor
7. An ________ the structure of the files and directories on a computer system.

a. operating system

8. An ________ keeps track of the amount of disk space used by a specific file.
a. operating system
9. Which software allows you to create, copy, move and delete files?
a. operating system
10. Which of the following is not an operating system?

a. DOS
b. Windows
c. Linux
d. Disk Defragmentor
Answer: d. Disk Defragmentor
11. Which of the following is a free and open-source operating system?

a. DOS
b. Windows
c. Linux
d. None of these
Answer: c. Linux
12. Which of the following is not a mobile operating system?

a. Android
b. iOS
c. Windows Phone
d. Linux
Answer: d. Linux
13. Which of the following is not a mobile operating system?

a. iOS
b. Windows Phone
c. Android
d. None of these
Answer: d. None of these
14. Which of the following is not an interactive/GUI-based operating system?

a. Android
b. DOS
c. Windows
d. Linux
Answer: b. DOS

15. DOS stands for ________
(a) Disk Operating System
(b) Dot Operating System
(c) Disk Open System
(d) Disk Operating Secure
Answer: (a) Disk Operating System
16. Which of the following is Microsoft Product?

(a) DOS
(b) Windows
(c) Android
(d) Linux
Answer: (b) Windows
17. ________________ operating system is an example of an interactive operating system.

(a) Windows
(b) DOS
(c) Linux
Answer: (a) Windows
18. GUI stands for __________

(a) Graphical User Interface
(b) Graphical User Interaction
(c) Graphical User Interactive
Answer: (a) Graphical User Interface
19. Which operating system allows only one user to do a task on the computer and one thing at a
time?
(a) Single-user, multi-task operating system
(b) Single-user , single-task operating system
(c) Multi-user
Answer: (b) Single-user, single-task operating system
20. Which Operating System is used to control machineries like robots in complex animations and
computer-controlled automated machines
(a) Real Time
(b) Multi-user
(c) Single-user, multi-task operating system
(d) Distributed
Answer: (a) Real Time
21. Examples of real-time operating systems is :

(a) Windows CE
(b) Lynx OS
Answer: (c) Both of the above
22. Examples of distributed operating systems is

(a) Windows
(b) Unix
(c) Linux
23. ___________ operating system enables multiple users to work on the same computer
simultaneously.
(a) Single-user , single-task operating system
(b) Single-user, multi-task operating system
(c) Multi-user
Answer: (c) Multi-user
24. Which Operating System enables single user to operate on several programs at the same time.
(a) Single-user, multi-task operating system
(b) Multi-user
(c) Single-user , single-task operating system
(d) Real Time
Answer: (a) Single-user, multi-task operating system
25. Example of a Multi-Tasking Operating System is

(a) Windows
(b) Apple MacOS
26. An operating system in which commands can be entered by clicking/double-clicking/right-

clicking a mouse is :
(a) GUI-based
(b) CUI-based
(c) TUI-based
Answer: (a) GUI-based
27. Examples of Mobile operating Systems is :

(a) Android
(b) Symbian
(c) iOS
28. The first screen that appears on monitor after loading OS is called ________________
(a) Icons
(b) Desktop
(c) Wall paper
Answer: (b) Desktop
29. Small pictures on the desktop are called _______

(a) Desktop
(b) Symbols
(c) Icons
(d) Pictures
Answer: (c) Icons
30. Picture used for the desktop background is called __________

(a) Wallpaper
(b) Background image
(c) Wall image
(d) Desktop image
Answer: (a) Wallpaper
31. Start button is present on _________ side of the Taskbar.

(a) right
(b) left
(c) top
(d) bottom
Answer: (b) left
32. Bar present at the bottom of the desktop is called ____________

(a) Status bar
(b) Scroll bar
(c) Taskbar
Answer: (c) Taskbar
33. Components of Windows 7 Desktop is/are :

(a) Desktop
(b) Wallpaper
(c) Taskbar
34. Which icons allows user to access all drives, files, and folders on the computer.
(a) Recycle Bin
(b) Computer
(c) Application
(d) Start button
Answer: (b) Computer
35. The main components of Taskbar is/are

(a) Start button
(b) Active Applications
(c) Date/Time icon
36. Deleted files and folders are stored in ___________

(a) Recycle bin
(b) My Computer
(c) Control Panel
Answer: (a) Recycle bin
37. Everything we store in computer is stored in the form of a __________.

(a) Folder
(b) Sub folder
(c) File
Answer: (c) File
38. _______ is a way in which you give name to a file, store it and retrieve it.
(a) Operating System
(b) Formatting System
(c) File System
Answer: (c) File
39. Files can be separately placed into groups, called _____.

(a) Folders
(b) Directories
(c) Both a and b
Answer: (c) Both a and b
40. A _______ may contain one or more files and sub-folders within. This allows easy accessibility
of files.
(a) Folder
(b) Directory
(c) Sub-folder
Answer: (c) Sub-folder
41. A new folder is created with the default name _____.

(a) New Folder
(b) New Directory
(c) New
(d) None of these
Answer: (a) New Folder
42. A ________ menu is appearing, when you right-click in a blank area of the desktop.
(a) Shortcut Menu
(b) Context Menu
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of these
Answer: (c) Both (a) and (b)
43. What is the shortcut key to rename a file or folder in windows?

(a) Ctrl + R
(b) F2
(c) Alt + R
(d) Ctrl + F2
Answer: (b) F2
44. Which of the following functions is not performed using a mouse?

(a) Turn on
(b) Hover
(c) Right click
(d) Drag and Drop
Answer: (a) Turn on
45. What is the shortcut key to delete a file or folder in windows?

(a) Del
(b) Ctrl + D
(c) Alt + D
(d) Ctrl + Del
Answer: (a) Del
46. Similar types of files can be placed into a group called ___________
(a) File
(b) Folder
(c) Shortcut
(d) None of these
Answer: (b) Folder
47. To change the name of the folder, right-click and select __________ option from the Shortcut
menu.
(a) Change Name
(b) Modify Name
(c) Rename
(d) None of these
Answer: (c) Rename
48. To create a file, in the shortcut menu, click New and select the __________ of the file you want to
create.
(a) type
(b) name
(c) new
(d) None of these
Answer: (a) type
49. What is the term used when you press and hold the left mouse key and move the mouse around?
(a) Highlighting
(b) Dragging
(c) Selecting
(d) Moving
Answer: (b) Dragging
50. Which of the following ways you can use to copy / move files and folders?
(a) Shortcut Menu
(b) Drag and Drop
(c) Using Keyboard (Shortcut keys)
51. To copy a file/folder, right-click and select __________ option from the Shortcut menu.
(a) Copy
(b) Duplicate
(c) Move
(d) Cut
Answer: (a) Copy
52. To paste a file/folder, right-click and select __________ option from the Shortcut menu.
(a) Stick
(b) Glue
(c) Paste
(d) Cream
Answer: (c) Paste
53. To copy a file/folder using Drag and Drop method, hold down the _____ key while dragging it to
the new location.
(a) Alt
(b) Shift
(c) Ctrl
(d) Alt + Ctrl
Answer: (c) Ctrl
54. What is the shortcut keys to copy something?

(a) Ctrl + X
(b) Ctrl + C
(c) Ctrl + Z
(d) Ctrl + V
Answer: (b) Ctrl + C
55. What is the shortcut keys to paste something?

(a) Ctrl + X
(b) Ctrl + C
(c) Ctrl + Z
(d) Ctrl + V
Answer: (d) Ctrl + V
56. When you ______ a file or a folder, a duplicate of the original file or folder is created at the new
location, and the original remains as it is.
(a) Copy
(b) Cut
(c) Rename
(d) Delete
Answer: (a) Copy
57. When you ______ a file or a folder, the original file or folder is moved to the new location?
(a) move
(b) cut
(c) copy
(d) Either (a) or (b)
Answer: (d) Either (a) or (b)
58. You can permanently delete the contents of the Recycle Bin. Right-click the Recycle Bin icon
and then click ______.
(a) Empty
(b) Delete
(c) Empty Recycle Bin
(d) Delete Recycle Bin
Answer: (c) Empty Recycle Bin

59. To recover a file from the Recycle Bin, right-click the file, and then click ________.
(a) Recover
(b) Restore
(c) Move
(d) Undelete
Answer: (b) Restore
60. To restore a file from the Recycle Bin, select the file, and click ________.
(a) Recover this item
(b) Restore this item
(c) Move this item
(d) Undelete this item
Answer: (b) Restore this item
1. What is ICT?
Answer Information and Communication Technology (ICT) is an acronym for information and
communication technology.
ICT helps in the proper sharing, receiving, and processing of information, and an ICT device is a
device that is used for processing, storing, and delivering information to others.
Examples of ICT devices are Laptop, Desktop, Tablets and Smartphones.
2. Objectives of Information and communication technology? Advantages and disadvantages

of ICT.
Answer Full form of ICT is Information and communication technology. The goal of ICT is to
bridge the gap between parents, educators, and students by encouraging sustainable, cooperative,
and transparent communication methods.
Advantages of ICT
a. Enhanced the modes of communication
b. Independent learning platforms Cost efficient
c. Enhanced data and information security
d. Paperless Eliminate the usage of paper
e. Better teaching and learning methods
f. Web based LMS tools
Disadvantages of ICT
a. Traditional books and handwritten methods are at risk.
b. Managing courses online is difficult
c. Teachers require experience to handle ICT
d. Risk of cyber attacks and hacks
e. Misuse of technology
3. Difference between Hardware and Software?

Answer A computer system consists of two main parts Hardware and Software
a. Hardware Hardware is a physical part of a computer system. We can feel and touch the
hardware devices. example CPU, Mother Board, Hard Disk, Keyboard, Mouse, Printer etc.
b. Software Software related to the programs which perform different types of tasks on the
computer system. Program is a collection of Instructions. It also helps the computer to perform
the specific task. Example Open Office Base, Spreadsheet, Presentation etc.

4. What is BIOS?
Answer BIOS stands for Basic Input/ Output System, It helps the computer system to identify
(Self-test) the paraperaphal devices which are connected to the computer system and helps
computers to load Operating System properly.
5. What are the different types of keys in Keyboard?

Answer
a. Function keys F1 to F12 are function keys in the keyboard, function keys are used for specific
purposes.
b. Control keys SHIFT, CONTROL (CTRL),ALT, SPACEBAR, TAB AND CAPS LOCK are
known as a control key, these keys are used as per the demand.
c. Enter key ENTER or RETURN keys are known as Enter key, depending on the brand of
computer that you are using.
d. Punctuation keys It includes keys for punctuation marks, such as colon (:), semicolon (;),
question mark (?), single quotation marks ( ), and double quotation marks ( ).
e. Navigation keys END, HOME, PAGE DOWN, PAGE UP and Arrow keys are known as
navigation keys, these keys are used to move up, down, left or right in the document.
f. Command keys BACKSPACE, INSERT (INS) and DELETE(DEL) are known as command
keys. INSERT key allows you to overwrite characters to the right side.
The DELETE command key and BACKSPACE key are used to remove typed text, character, or
any other objects from the right and left side of the cursor.
g. Windows key Windows key is used to open the Start menu.
6. What is the purpose of Mouse?

Answer The purpose of the mouse is
a. Roll Over or Hover Whenever we bring the mouse over the files, it shows the details of the
file.
b. Click or Double Click Mouse allows you to select, open or delete files and folders from the
computer system.
c. Drag and Drop Click on the file and drag and drop your file where you want.
7. What are files and folders in a computer system?

Answer
a. File File is a collection of information different types of files store different types of
information. Every file has a file name and extension that identifies the type of file.
b. Folder Folder is a collection of files or a group of files.
8. How to maintain a computer system?

Answer Some simple ways to take care of computer system are
a. Keeping a Device Clean Always keep a device clean, such as the keyboard, the screen, and
the mouse. Handle your gadget with care, keep it cool, and don t overload your battery.
b. Prepare a Maintenance Schedule Make a schedule for computer maintenance.
Daily Maintenance
a. Clean up your email inbox
b. Save Important attachments and save in folder
Weekly Maintenance
a. Clean your Keyboard, monitor, CPU and printer
b. Backup your data
Monthly Maintenance
a. Clean unused photographs
b. Clean up Download folder
c. Uninstall unused programs
d. Run full system virus scan
e. Run disk cleaner software
Yearly / Annual Maintenance

a. Clean up social media accounts
b. Clean up e-mail contact list
c. Update your operating System
9. How to increase Computer performance?

Answer We frequently install a large number of applications, which slows down the computer.
Always attempt to uninstall unnecessary applications, temporary files, and antivirus software
updates.
10. What is a Security Break?

Answer Security break is leakage of information stored in a computer.
Your personal information can be lost or leaked in two ways
We are not cautious when it comes to disclosing personal information via the internet. We share
our account information and passwords on unsafe websites.
A person gets unauthorized access to our computer. This can happen at work if we don t log out
before leaving the computer.
11. What are the threats?

Answer Threats are ways in which personal information from a computer can be released
without our knowledge.
a. Theft Theft means stealing of information or hardware. These maybe of three types:
i. Physical Where a person may steal your desktop computer or laptop.
ii. Identity A hacker gets your personal information and uses it to impersonate you. The
hacker can use this fake identity to get access to your account information or engage in illegal
activity.
b. Software Piracy This is stealing of software and includes using or distributing unlicensed and
unauthorized copies of a computer program or software.
i. Virus Viruses are computer programmes that can corrupt data and software applications,
as well as steal data from computers. Worms and Trojan Horses are two major forms of viruses.
ii. Worms Worms are viruses that replicate and spread to all files on a computer once they
attack a computer. This makes it very difficult to remove them.
A Trojan Horse appears to be a useful software programme, but once it reaches a computer, it
begins to behave like a virus and destroys the data.
iii. Online Predator Online predators are persons who use the internet to trap you into
unhealthy relationships. They could be older people appearing as your age who harass you into
doing unlawful things online.
iv. Internet Scams You may occasionally receive highly appealing offers claiming that you
have won a large sum of money in a lottery and that you can claim your win by depositing a
specific amount of money. When you deposit money with a credit card or through online banking,
you not only lose the deposit money but your card / account information may be misused later.
12. How can we protect our data?

Answer To protect our data from theft and viruses we can take the following measures
a. Use Strong password in your account Make your passwords difficult to guess. When creating
a new password, attempt to use a combination of
Small Character
Capital Character
Special Character
Numbers
b. Install Antivirus and Firewall Anti-virus software and a firewall protect your data from virus
and from hackers.
c. Encrypt your data Keep your information in an encrypted format to keep it safe from
unauthorized users.
d. Open only secure site Before visiting a website, make sure the address begins with https://. A
website that begins with https:// is a secure website.
Q1. What do you mean by ICT?

Ans. ICT stands for Information and Communication Technology. ICT refers to all the tools related
to storing, recording and sending digital information.
Q2. Differentiate between Hardware and Software ?

Ans.
Hardware: The physical components that we can see and touch.
Monitor, Keyboard are examples of Hardware
Software: It is a set of programs/instructions that perform a specific task
MS Paint, MS Word are examples of Software.
Q3. What do you mean by Operating System?

Ans. Operating System : It is a software that act as an interface between the user and the computer.
Q4. Give two examples of mobile operating system.

Ans. Two examples of mobile operating system :
a. Apple iOS
b. Google Android
Q5. Name two operating systems for laptops or desktop.

Ans. Two operating systems for laptops or desktop are:
a. Ubuntu
b. Microsoft Windows
Q6. Identify me
a. I am a physical part of computer.
b. I am a collection of instruction doing specific task.
c. I am the software that starts working as soon as we switch on a computer.
d. I am an input device used to type text, numbers etc
e. I am a small device that you can use to move, select and open items on your computer screen.
Ans. a. Hardware b. Software c. Operating System d. Keyboard e. Mouse
Q7. Expand BIOS?

Ans. BIOS stands for Basic Input/Output System
Q8. What do you mean by Input device? Give two examples.

Ans. Those devices which are used to feed data/command into the computer are called Input device.
for example Keyboard and Mouse.

Q9. What do you mean by drag and drop?
Ans. Moving an item from one location to another with the help of mouse button. This is called drag
and drop.
Q10. Differentiate between files and folder.

Ans.
File: A place where information is stored in computer. It has a name and extension both
Folder: A location where a group of files can be stored. It has only name.
Q11. Write the extension for the following.

a. A Notepad file
b. A Sound File
c. An image file
Ans. Extensions are a. .txt b. .mp3 c. .jpg
Q12. The file name and file name extension are separated by a ________________
Ans. dot ( . )
Q13. Write the steps to create folder on desktop?

Ans. The steps to create folder on desktop are:
1. Right-click on desktop and then choose the New Folder .
2. Type the name of the folder.
Q14. Write the shortcut command for the following.

a. Cut
b. Copy
c. Paste
d. Undo
e. Redo
f. Select all
Ans. Shortcut commands are:
a. Cut - Ctrl + X
b. Copy - Ctrl + C
c. Paste - Ctrl + V
d. Undo - Ctrl + Z
e. Redo - Ctrl + Y
f. Select all - Ctrl + A
Q15. Write the basic tips for taking care of Laptop/Desktop.

Ans. Basic tips for taking care of Computer are :
1. Avoid eating anything over a keyboard.
2. Wipe the screen with a soft cloth.
3. Avoid eating or drinking near computer.
4. Handle and move your laptop carefully.
Q16. What do you mean by Data Backup?

Ans. Backing up data means to save the information present on your computer on another device,
such as CD/DVD drives or hard disk.
Q17. What do you mean by Spam?

Ans. We get mails from companies who are advertising a product or trying to attract you to their
website. Such mails are called Spam.

Q18. How can you increase the performance of a computer?
Ans. We can increase the performance of a computer by
a. Using an updated Antivirus Software
b. Removing unnecessary files and data, such as temporary files and images.
Q19. ________________ is leakage of information stored in a computer.

Ans. Security break
Q20. What do you mean by Virus?

Ans. Viruses are computer programs that can damage the data and software programs or steal the
information stored on a computer.
Q21. Name two types of Virus.

Ans. Worms and Trojan Horse
Q22. Differentiate between Worms and Trojan Horse.

Ans.
Worms: These are viruses that replicate and spread to all files once they attack a computer.
Trojan: A Trojan Horse seems to be a useful program but once it reaches a computer it starts
destroying data.
Q23. What do you mean by Online predators?

Ans. Online Predator: Online predators are people who trap you into inappropriate relationships.
Q24. Write few tips to protect your data from online theft and viruses.
Ans. Few tips to protect our data from online theft and viruses are:
a. Use passwords to login to your computer:
b. Install Anti-virus and Firewall:
c. Use Data Encryption
d. Give details of your credit card or bank account only on secure sites
Q25. What do you mean by threats to Computer?

Ans. Threats are the ways in which personal information can be leaked from a computer without our
knowing.
Q26. List the various threats to a computer and its data.

Ans. The various threats to a computer and its data are:
1 Virus
2. Phishing
3. Online theft
4. Cyber crime
5. Hacking
Q27. __________________ is stealing of software and using of unlicensed and unauthorized copies
of a computer software.
Ans. Software Piracy
Q28. What is s in https ?

Ans. s stands for secure.
Q29. Name the encrypting feature of Windows.

Ans. BitLocker

Q30. List the various types of keys available on Keyboard.
Ans. The various types of keys available on Keyboard are :
a. Control keys
b. Function Keys
c. Alphabet Keys
d. Numeric Keys
e. Navigation Keys
Q31. When the ____________ key is turned ON, it helps to overwrite characters to the right of the
cursor.
Ans. INSERT
Q32. Name two keys available on keyboard which are used to remove typed text or characters.
Ans. Delete and Backspace
Q33. _________ key helps to move the cursor to the beginning of a new line.
Ans. RETURN or ENTER
Q34. Pressing ______________ key opens the Start menu.

Ans. Windows
Q35. Name any two file extensions.

Ans. Two file extensions are : a) .txt b) .doc c) .jpg d) .xls

ENTREPRENEURIAL SKILLS II
REVISION NOTES
ENTREPRENEUR
The word entrepreneur is derived from the French word entrepreneur which means to undertake.
An entrepreneur is an individual who creates a new business, bearing most of the risks and enjoying
most of the rewards.
A person who sets up a business or businesses, taking on financial risks in the hope of profit.
or
A promoter in the entertainment industry.
or
An entrepreneur is a person who sets up a business with the aim to make a profit.
or
Entrepreneurship is the process of designing, launching and running a new business, which is often
initially a small business. The people who create these businesses are called entrepreneurs.
or
An entrepreneur is the person who sees a problem in the world and immediately focuses on creating
the solution. They re the leaders that strike out on their own to improve society. Whether they re
creating jobs or a new product, they constantly take action to ensure world progress.
ENTREPRENEUR SKILLS
There are many skills required to start a business. The most popular entrepreneur skills are marketing,
business development, customer service, leadership, execution, resilience, focus, determination, talent
acquisition, continuous learner.
ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SOCIETY

Entrepreneurship: The meaning of entrepreneurship involves an entrepreneur who takes action to
make a change in the world. Whether startup entrepreneurs solve a problem that many struggle with
each day, bring people together in a way no one has before, or build something revolutionary that
advances society, they all have one thing in common: action.
It s not some idea that s stuck in your head. Entrepreneurs take the idea and execute it.
Entrepreneurship is about execution of ideas.
Society: Society can be described as an aggregate of people living together in a community or
basically a situation of being in the company of others. The persons that comprise a population
associate for various engagements including business.
QUALITIES/CHARACTERISTICS OF A GOOD ENTREPRENEUR:

The major qualities/characteristics of a good entrepreneur are linked below
 Leadership: An entrepreneur must possess the characteristics of leadership and must lead a
team for achievement of goals. The leader is able to clearly articulate their ideas and has a clear
vision. An entrepreneurial leader realises the importance of initiative and reactiveness and they
go out of their way to provide a support to the team.
 Risk Taking: An entrepreneur with rational planning and firm decisions bear the risks. They
have differentiated approach towards risks. Good entrepreneurs are always ready to invest their
time and money but they always have a back up for every risk they take.
 Innovativeness: With the changing needs and requirements of customers production should
meet requirements with the help of innovative ideas. An entrepreneurial venture does not have to
restrict itself to just one innovation or even one type of innovation. Success can be built on
combination of innovation. For example, a new product delivered in a new way with a new
message.

 Goal-oriented: Goal-oriented entrepreneurs achieve the maximum results from their efforts in
business due to the fact they work towards clear and measurable targets.
 Decision-maker: An entrepreneur has to take many decisions to put his business idea into
reality. He chooses the best suitable and profitable alternative.
 Highly Optimistic: A successful entrepreneur is always optimistic and the present problems
does not matter to them. He is always hopeful that the situation will became favourable for
business in future.
 Motivator: An entrepreneur has to create a spirit of team work and motivate them. So that he
gets full cooperation from the employees.
 Self-confident: An entrepreneur should have confidence to achieve his goals otherwise he won t
be able to convince his team to achieve his goals.
 Action-oriented: An entrepreneur should have an action oriented vision and ideology to plan
things well.
 Dynamic Agent: An entrepreneur creates new needs and new means to satisfy them. He has the
ability to visualise new ventures and new plans.
 High Achiever: An entrepreneurs are high achievers as they have a strong urge to achieve. The
most important characteristic is his achievement motivation.
 Trust in Self: An entrepreneur believes on their own decisions and actions as he has trust in his
perseverance and creations. He does not believe in luck.
ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND ECONOMY

Entrepreneurship plays an influential role in the economic growth and standard of living of the
country. As a startup founder or small business owner, you may think that you are simply working
hard to build your own business and provide for yourself and your family. But you are actually doing
a whole lot more for your local community, state, region, and the country as a whole.
An entrepreneur is the builder of economic growth. He promotes the prosperity of a country by his
initiative and skill for innovation and dynamic leadership. He creates wealth, opens up employment
opportunities and fosters the other segments of economic system.
The role and significance of an entrepreneur are given under the following headings
 Organiser of Society s Productive Resources: An entrepreneur is the organiser of society s
productive resources. He is the person who assembles the unused natural, physical and human
resources of the society, combines them properly, establishes effective coordination between
them and makes the economic activities dynamic.
 Helpful in Capital Formation: An entrepreneur is helpful in capital formation as we know that
increase in the rate of capital formation is quite essential for the economic development of any
country. Those nations which are not able to increase the rate of capital formation or does it
nominally remain backward from industrial development s point of view.
 Increase in Employment Opportunities: An entrepreneur creates maximum employment
opportunities in the society by way of establishing new industries, developing and expanding the
existing industries and by undertaking innovative activities.
 Development of New Production Techniques: An entrepreneur does not feel contended only
with the existing techniques of production. Hence, he carries out various experiments for saving
time, labour and capital in the production, as also to improve the variety and quality of the
product and service.
 Visionary Leader: An entrepreneur has a good vision towards the achievement of his goals. He
is able to recognise profitable opportunities and conceptualise strategies.
 Contribution of the Execution of Government Policies: An entrepreneur provide an important
contribution in implementing government policies and achieving the national goals. An
entrepreneurs cooperate with the government for implementations of development plans of the
country.
 Higher Productivity: Entrepreneur have the ability to produce more goods and services with
less inputs. They play an important role in raising productivity.

 Initiator: An entrepreneur is the one who initiates the process of creating an enterprise by
coming up with the idea for the business and planning out how to turn that idea into reality.
 Backbone of Capitalist System: Capitalist economy is one in which there is a freedom to save
and invest to compete and operate any business. An entrepreneur plays a vital and prominent role
in the enterprise because he controls market by assuming the role of a competitor and a leader.
 Ingredient of Modern Production System: An entrepreneur has become the balancing wheel
of modern global economy. They seek the unique product, change the technical frontiers and
reshape public desires. Today, entrepreneurs act as an ingredient of modem production system as
they create wealth and employment.
MYTHS OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP
Entrepreneurship is a set of activities performed by the entrepreneur. It is the process of identifying
opportunities in the market place. It is the attempt to create value. Many entrepreneurs believe a set of
myths about entrepreneurship and the most common are as follows
 Starting a Business is Easy: In reality, it is a very difficult and challenging process to start a
successful business. The rate of failure of new ventures is very high but small entrepreneurship
are comparatively easier to start.
 Lot of Money to Finance New Business: Successful entrepreneurs design their business with
little cash also.
 Startups cannot be Financed: Under the schemes like MUDRA, entrepreneurs can raise loans
from banks.
 Talent is more Important than Industry: This is not true as the nature of industry an
entrepreneur chooses greatly effects the success and growth of the business.
 Most Startups are Successful: Mostly in the developing countries startups fail as they could not
manage to earn high profits.
ADVANTAGES OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP
The main advantages of adopting entrepreneurship as a career are discussed below
Independence: An entrepreneur is himself a boss or owner and he can take all the decisions
independently.
 Exciting: Entrepreneurship can be very exciting with many entrepreneurs considering their
ventures highly enjoyable. Everyday will be filled with new opportunities to challenge your
determination, skills and abilities.
 Wealth Creation: The principal focus of entrepreneurship is wealth creation and improved
livelihood by means of making available goods and services. Entrepreneurial venture generates
new wealth, new and improved products, services or technology form entrepreneurs, enable new
markets to be developed and new wealth to be created.
 Flexibility: As an entrepreneur you can schedule your work hours around other commitments,
including quality time you would spend with your family.
 Status: Success in entrepreneurship beings a considerable fame and prestige within the society.
 Ambition Fulfilment: Through entrepreneurship one can fulfil his ambitions into original
products or services.
DISADVANTAGES OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP
Some of the disadvantages of entrepreneurship as a career are discussed below
Huge Amount of Time: You have to dedicate a huge amount of time to your own business.
Entrepreneurship is not easy and for it to be successful, you have to take a level of time commitment.
 Risk: An entrepreneurship involves high risk of loss. If the business fails then it will wipe away
all the personal savings.
 Hard Work: An entrepreneur has to work very hard to make the new business very successful.
 Uncertain Income: There is no regular or fixed income available to an entrepreneur. So, there is
uncertain kind of income received by an entrepreneur.

 Incompetent Staff: A new entrepreneur may not be able to hire qualified and experienced staff
so there are chances of incompetency by the staff due to lack of experience and knowledge.
ENTREPRENEURSHIP AS A CAREER OPTION

A career is a line of work that a person takes for life. There are two ways a person can earn a living.
They are
1. self-employment
2. wage employment
For example, a doctor who works for a hospital is a wage employed person. If the same doctor has
their own clinic, he or she is a self-employed person.
A self-employed person running a business to satisfy a need by trying new ideas is an entrepreneur.
A person who becomes an entrepreneur goes through a career process. This process is as follows:

ENTREPRENEURIAL SKILLS II
NCERT/CBSE TEXTBOOK QUESTIONS
A. Here are some stories of some entrepreneurs. Tick the option for the quality they are
showing.
1. Ravi s customer comes to his store and starts shouting at him. He does not get angry. He listens to
what his customer is saying. He is ____________.
(a) hardworking (b) confident (c) patient (d) prying new ideas
Ans: (c) patient
2. Susheela decides to sell her company tyres in Sri Lanka. It does not sell and she has a loss. She
apologises to the people who work for her. She says she will plan better next time. She
_______________________.
(a) takes responsibility for your mistakes
(b) thinks before making a decision
(c) does not give up
(d) is creative
Ans: (a) takes responsibility for your mistakes
B. Tick the correct option for the function that the entrepreneur is doing.
1. Ali has a diamond factory. He pays his employees on the 1st of every month.
(a) Creates a new product (b) Manages the business (c) Takes risk
Ans: (b) Manages the business
2. Mary buys bulbs for her business from Noida. She learns that bulbs are cheaper in Faridabad. So,
she decides to start buying bulbs from there.
(a) Makes decisions (b) Divides income (c) Takes risk
Ans: (a) Makes decisions
3. Rehnuma has two people who work for her. Every day, she spends one hour with them to learn
about what they ve done that day.
(a) Creates a new product (b) Divides income (c) Manages the business
Ans: (c) Manages the business
C. Write against the option, if the business idea is of self-employment or wage employment.
(a) Cooking in a restaurant
Ans. Wage Employment
(b) Owning a clothing business
Ans. Self Employment
(c) Having a dosa selling stall
Ans. Self Employment
D. Subjective question
1. List the ways in which an entrepreneur affects a society.
Ans: The ways in which an entrepreneur affects a society are:
 Fulfil Customer Needs: Entrepreneurs find out what people want. Then, they use their creativity
to come up with a business idea that will meet that demand.
 Use Local Materials: Entrepreneurs use the material and people available around them, to make
products at low cost.

 Help Society: They make profits through activities that benefit society. Some entrepreneurs work
towards saving the environment, some give money to build schools and hospitals. This way, the
people and area around them becomes better.
 Create Jobs: With the growth of a business, entrepreneurs look for more people to help them.
They buy more material, and from more people.The also hire more people to work for them.
 Sharing of Wealth: As entrepreneurs grow their business, the people working for them and in
related businesses also grow.
 Lower Price of Products: As more entrepreneurs sell the same product, the price of the product
goes down. For example, when more mobile phones were getting sold in India, the cost of the
phone became lesser.
2. What do you think are the important functions of an entrepreneur? Write your answer giving
suitable examples.
Ans. The functions of an entrepreneur are:
 Making Decisions: An entrepreneur makes decisions everyday. This includes what to produce or
sell, how much and where to sell.
 Managing the Business: An entrepreneur plans the future of his or her business. He/she arranges
for raw material, hires people for work and tells everyone what to do. They also check if the plan
is being followed.
 Divide Income: The entrepreneur divides the business money into many groups. He/she spends
money to buy material, pays rent of the building and salaries to people.
 Taking Risk: Risk is the chance of something going wrong. An entrepreneur takes risks against
fires, lost items and theft.
 Create a new Method, Idea or Product: An entrepreneur is always trying new things. He/she
does this to increase their importance and income.
3. What is the difference between a misconception and reality? Give an example.

Ans. The difference between misconception and reality are:
Misconception: A myth, or a misconception, is a false belief or opinion about something. For
example, if we think tall people run faster than short people, we have a misconception. It is not true.
The truth is that short people can also run fast.
Reality: Reality means the things which actually exist. It may happen that it appears or nor. You may
have unnoticed it but in actual it exists. In other words, the reality is all the things which has real
existence irrespective of appearance or not.
OBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS
1. _________ is the type of self-employment where one is running a business to satisfy the needs of
people and looking for ways to make the business better.
(a) Entrepreneurship
(b) Entrepreneur
(c) Business Idea
(d) Entrepreneurist
Answer: (a) Entrepreneurship
2. Which of the following are the qualities of successful entrepreneurs?

(a) They are confident.
(b) They take responsibility for their actions.
(c) They work hard
3. _________ are people who work for a person or an organization and get paid for that work.
(a) Self employed
(b) Wage employed
Answer : (b) Wage employed
4. ________ people are those who start businesses to satisfy the needs of people.
(a) Self-employed
(b) Wage-employed
Answer : (a) Self-employed
5. A self-employed person who is always trying to make his/her business better by taking risks and
trying new ideas is called _______ .
(a) Skilled man
(b) Business man
(c) Entrepreneur
Answer : (c) Entrepreneur
6. Ramya and Ramu both own plant shops. Ramu sits at his shop every day. When customers come,
he sells to them. Ramya walks around and gets customers to her shop. She also sells seeds and
flowers. Who is Entrepreneur out of Ramya and Ramu.
(a) Ramya
(b) Ramu
Answer : (c) Both of the above
7. What do entrepreneurs do when they run their business?

(a) They help in increasing jobs in their area.
(b) Helping the people in the society to earn money.
Answer : (c) Both of the above
8. Qualities of successful entrepreneurs are.

(a) They keep trying new ideas.
(b) They are confident.
(c) They are creative
9. Ravi s customer comes to his store and starts shouting at him. He does not get angry. He listens to
what his customer is saying. He is ________.
(a) Hardworking
(b) Confident
(c) Patient
(d) Trying new ideas
Answer : (c) Patient

10. Susheela decides to sell her company tyres in Sri Lanka. It does not sell and she has a loss. She
apologises to the people who work for her. She says she will plan better next time. She
_________ .
(a) takes responsibility for her mistakes
(d) is creative
Answer: (a) takes responsibility for her mistakes
11. As an entrepreneur, you should be _______ .

(a) Creative
(b) Hard Working
(c) Decision Maker
12. An entrepreneur do the things as ________ .

(a) others are doing
(b) different from others.
(c) a lazy person
Answer: (b) different from others.
13. The money used to start a business is called ________ .

(a) Capital
(b) Business Money
(c) Start ups
Answer: (a) Capital
14. Success of entrepreneur depends on _________ .

(a) Hard Work
(b) Good Idea
15. Which of the following are misconception about Entrepreneur?

(a) Entrepreneurs are born, not made.
(b) A person having a big business is an entrepreneur.
(c) A person needs a lot of money to start a business.
16. A doctor who works for a hospital is a _______ person.

(a) Wage employed
(b) Self employed
Answer: (a) Wage employed
17. Dr. Ravi has his own clinic so he is a _____________ Person.

(a) Self-employed
(b) Wage-employed
Answer: (a) Self-employed
18. Positive impact of entrepreneurship on society is _________

(a) Accentuates economic Growth
(b) Encourages welfare of the society
(c) Solves the problems of the society
19. Society plays a role in boosting entrepreneurship by ___________ .

(a) Providing raw materials
(b) Creating needs and demands
20. Adverse impact of entrepreneurship on society is ____________ .

(a) Environmental degradation
(b) Trade imbalance
(c) Labour exploitation
Answer: (d) None of the above
21. Which of the following social problems are tackled by social entrepreneurs?
(a) Low reach of quality education
(b) Unemployment
(c) Child labour
22. Agricultural Entrepreneurship helps farmers in _________ .

(a) finding low-cost innovations in farming processes.
(b) giving loans to farmers
(c) giving jobs to the family members of farmers.
Answer: (a) finding low-cost innovations in farming processes.
23. Which of the following entrepreneurship refers to starting industries in which manufacturing,
trading, providing services, productions are done on a micro scale?
(a) Women Entrepreneurship
(b) Agricultural Entrepreneurship
(c) Small Scale Entrepreneurship
Answer: Small Scale Entrepreneurship
24. Entrepreneurship skills helps ___________ .

(a) to develop ability to handle failure.
(b) in making difference to the society.
(c) to develop critical thinking
25. Which of the following are commercial functions of Entrepreneur?

(a) Innovation
(b) Finance and Accounting
(c) Leadership
Answer : (d) All of the above
26. An enterprise owned and controlled by a woman and giving at least 51 per cent of the
employment generated in the enterprise to women is ___________ .
(a) Agricultural Entrepreneurship
(b) Small Scale Entrepreneurship
(c) Social Entrepreneurship
(d) Women Entrepreneurship
Answer: (d) Women Entrepreneurship
27. Entrepreneurs can create jobs in the market. ( T / F )

(a) True
(b) False
Answer: (a) True
28. When many entrepreneurs sell mobile phones in a market, the prices of phones increase. (T/F)
(a) True
(b) False
Answer: (b) False
29. Entrepreneurs identify a need in the market and build a product or service for it. (T/F)
(a) True
(b) False
Answer: (a) True
30. All businesses are either skyrocket or fail. (T/F)

(a) True
(b) False
Answer: (a) True
SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS
31. State a difference between an entrepreneur and a businessman.

Ans. An entrepreneur is different from a conventional businessman. A businessman is someone
who sets up a business with an existing idea offering products and services to customers. An
entrepreneur, on the other hand, is a person who starts an enterprise with a new idea or concept or
a better way to offer an existing idea or concept.
32. What is a business plan?

Ans. An entrepreneur conducts studies to assess the feasibility of the market as regards the
proposed products or services. He makes an assessment of the resources required to run the
enterprise and the problems that may possibly be faced. Such a blue print of an enterprise is
termed as a business plan or a project report.
33. Why an entrepreneur is considered as an enterprising man ?

Ans. A business does not get started by itself. It is the entrepreneur who takes the risks and is
willing to face devastating failure. He braves uncertainty, strikes out on his own wit, devotion to
duty and singleness of purpose, somehow creates business and industrial activity where none
existed before. His values and activities have become integral to corporate culture.
34. What is the contribution of the entrepreneurs in the execution of government policies?
Ans. The entrepreneurs provide an important contribution in implementing government policies
and achieving the national goals. They cooperate with the government for implementations of
development plans of the country.
35. Explain the quality of an entrepreneur as a passionate person.

Ans. Successful entrepreneurs are passionate about making their business succeed. They
genuinely love their work and are willing to put in extra hours to make their business succeed.
Success gives them a joy that goes beyond money.
36. How does an entrepreneur promotes economic prosperity of a country?

Ans. Entrepreneurs can bring about drastic changes in the very structure of the economy. They
stand beyond challenges and make huge profits in every economic system. They are an important
source of economic development. They create jobs, wealth and capital in the country. They
promote investment, increase production and bring competitiveness in business, reduce costs of
products and raise the standard of living in society.
37. Why an entrepreneur is highly optimistic?

Ans. A successful entrepreneur is always optimistic and is not disturbed by the present problems
faced by him. He is always optimistic that the situation will become favourable for business in
future.
38. What is entrepreneurship development?

Ans. Entrepreneurship development is the process of improving the knowledge and skills of the
entrepreneurs. In other words, it can be said that entrepreneurship development is the process of
enhancing an entrepreneur s ability to develop, manage and organise a business venture, while
keeping in mind the risks associated with it.
39. What do you mean by the term entrepreneurial skills?

Ans. Entrepreneurial skills are the basic skills that help an entrepreneur to start, develop, finance
and successfully run a business. Every entrepreneur who is starting a business must have a
complete knowledge of the various aspects of his/her business, not only for the success of his
venture; but also for its growth and expansion.
40. Explain the risk bearing characteristic of an entrepreneur.

Ans. An entrepreneur has to have patience to see his efforts bearfruit. In the intervening period
(time gap between the conception and implementation of an idea and its results), an entrepreneur
has to assume risk. If an entrepreneur does not have the willingness to assume risk,
entrepreneurship would never succeed.
41. Do you think an entrepreneur is innovative by nature? Discuss.
Ans. Customer s requirements and tastes keep on changing, therefore, production should meet the
customer s requirements. Thus, innovativeness is another important characteristic of an
entrepreneur. He always tries to out strive others by taking initiative in doing new things, i.e.
exploring new products, new markets, new raw materials, new methods of production etc.
42. Do you think entrepreneur is a leader? Discuss.
Ans. An entrepreneur is essentially a leader. According to K.L. Sharma, a psychologist,
entrepreneurs are men who exhibit qualities of leadership in solving problems. They have to lead
a team for achievement of goals. Thus, an entrepreneur must have all universally accepted
qualities of a leader, i.e. initiative, high energy level, self-confidence, human relations skills,
motivational skills, creativity and keen desire to solve problems.
43. Explain the role of an entrepreneur as a catalytic agent.
Ans. As Joseph Schumpeter says, entrepreneur s task is creative destruction . He destroys to
create new things. He changes and transmutes values. He searches change and responds to it. He
is a change creator. Ralph Harwitz writes in his book Realities of Profitability , The entrepreneur
makes a happening, wants piece of action, is the growth man. Without him there is no happening,
no action, no growth.
44. Define an entrepreneur. Explain the leadership and decision-making qualities of an
entrepreneur.
Ans. An entrepreneur is someone who perceives opportunity, organises resources needed for
exploiting that opportunity and exploits it.
An entrepreneurial leader realises the importance of initiative and reactiveness as they go out of
their way to provide all support to the team.
Decision-making is an important function because it includes stabilising organisation s aims and
objectives and changes them according to the changing conditions.
45. Explain the creative and determined nature of an entrepreneur.
Ans. Creativity Creativity is probably the most important trait of an entrepreneur. Entrepreneurs
often come up with innovative solutions and repurpose their products to market them to new
industries. Repurposing means transforming a product for an alternative use.
Determination Successful entrepreneurs do not believe that something cannot be done. They make
determined efforts and work hard to achieve success in all their endeavours.
46. What are the myths of entrepreneurship? Explain.
Ans. The myths of entrepreneurship are as follows
(i) It is Easy to Start a Business: This depends on the scale of the enterprise. Starting up a large
entrepreneurial venture is a challenging process. Small scale enterprises are easier to set up.
Moreover, the rate of failure of new ventures is quite high all over the world. Just about one-third
of all enterprises become profitable only after operating for several years.
(ii) Lot of Money is needed to Startup a New Venture: Again, this depends on the type and
scale of the business venture. There are ventures that can be started with a small amount of
money. Big ventures need a lot of investment.
(iii) A Startup cannot Borrow from the Banks: Today our government is promoting startup
ventures and offering them loans on easy terms under various government schemes such as
MUDRA (Micro-units Development and Refinance Agency) and MSME (Micro, Small &
Medium Enterprises) scheme.
(iv) Businesses either Flourish or Fail: This is not always the case. Some ventures initially falter
or have lackluster growth rates. However, with right re-planning and effort they may go on to
achieve a healthy growth.
(v) A Good Idea is the only Requirement for a Successful Enterprise: Remember that even the
best of ideas need proper execution to become a reality. Ideas are important, but so are planning,
talent, leadership, communication and a host of other factors.
47. Explain the role and significance of entrepreneurs.

Ans. The role and significance of entrepreneurs are discussed below
(i) Organiser of Society s Productive Resources: An entrepreneur is the organises of society s
productive resources. He is the person who assembles the unused natural, physical and human
resources of the society, combines them properly, establishes effective coordination between them
and makes the economic activities dynamic.

(ii) Helpful in Capital Formation: An entrepreneur is helpful in capital formation or we know
that increase in the rate of capital formation is quite essential for the economic development of
any country.
(iii) Increase in Employment Opportunities: An entrepreneur creates maximum employment
opportunities in the society by way of establishing new industries, developing and expanding the
existing industries and by undertaking innovative activities.
48. Explain the role and significance of an entrepreneur as an enterprising man and a visionary
leader.
Ans. Enterprising Man A business does not get started by itself. It is the entrepreneur who takes
the risks and is willing to face devastating failure. He braves uncertainty, strikes out on his own
and through native wit, devotion to duty and singleness of purpose, somehow creates business and
industrial activity where none existed before. His values and activities have become integral to
corporate culture.
Visionary Leader An entrepreneur has a good vision and sense of mission. He instills inspiration.
He is able to recognise potentially profitable opportunities and to conceptualise the venture
strategy. He is the key force in successfully moving the idea from the laboratory to the market
place. He has the sense of accomplishment.
LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

49. Explain the role of an entrepreneur as Person with higher productivity and Ingredient of
modern production system.
Ans. Person with Higher Productivity: Entrepreneurs have the ability to produce more goods
and services with less inputs. They play an important role in raising productivity. John Kendrick
Bangs writes, Higher productivity is chiefly a matter of improving production techniques, and
this task is the entrepreneurial function par excellence. Two keys to higher productivity are
research and development and investment in new plant and machinery. But there is a close link
between R & D and investment programmes, with a higher entrepreneurial input into both.
Ingredient of Modern Production System: Entrepreneur has become the balancing wheel of
modern global economy. They seek the unique product, the marketing breakthrough. They change
technical frontiers and reshape public desires. They create wealth and employment.
50. Discuss the importance of entrepreneurship.
Ans. If we go through the business history of India, we come across many names who have
emerged as successful entrepreneurs, like Tatas, Birlas, Dalmia, Modi, Ambani etc. These
business houses started as small scale enterprises and have made their name in the list of
industrialists of world fame.
The success of small enterprises and their growth to leading industrial houses can be attributed to
entrepreneurs themselves. Thus, it is important to understand the success story of such
entrepreneurs. There are definitely some common personal characteristics in entrepreneurs.
The entrepreneur is in essence an institution which comprises of all people required to perform
various functions. The task of such people is to innovate, adjust or combine various factors of
production, and expand on account of change in demand and market conditions.
They must acknowledge the opportunities and must also be in a position to make opportunities
out of a given situation.
(i) It give Freedom: An entrepreneur is himself a boss or owner and he can take all the decisions
independently.
(ii) It can be Exciting: Entrepreneurship can be very exciting with many entrepreneurs
considering their ventures highly enjoyable. Every day will be filled with new opportunities to
challenge your determination, skills and abilities.
(iii) It Allows to Set your own Earnings: The principal focus of entrepreneurship is wealth
creation and improved livelihood by means of making available goods and services.
Entrepreneurial ventures generate new wealth. New and improved products, services or
technology from entrepreneurs, enable new markets to be developed and new wealth to be
created.
(iv) If offers Flexibility: As an entrepreneur you can schedule your work hours around other
commitments, including quality time you would spend with your family.
(v) Status: Success in entrepreneurship brings a considerable fame and prestige within the
society.
(vi) It offers Ambition-fulfilment: Through entrepreneurship one can fulfil his ambitions into
original products or services.
51. Describe the disadvantages of entrepreneurship as a career.
Ans. Some of the common disadvantages of entrepreneurship as a career are as follows
(i) Huge Amount of Time: You have to dedicate a huge amount of time to your own business.
Entrepreneurship is not easy and for it to be successful, you have to take a level of time
commitment.
(ii) Risk: Entrepreneurship involves high risk of loss. If the business fails then it will wipe away
all the personal savings.
(iii) Hard Work: Entrepreneur has to work very hard to make the new business very successful.
(iv) Uncertain Amount: There is no regular or fixed income available to an entrepreneur. So,
there is always uncertainty in terms of income.
(v) Incompetent Staff: A new entrepreneur may not be able to hire qualified and experienced
staff so there are chances of incompetency by the staff due to lack of experience and knowledge.
52. Write the Pros and Cons of being an entrepreneur
Ans: PROS:
 Freedom: There s no denying that one of the best parts of being an entrepreneur is the
complete freedom you have to do your own thing. No more bosses to report to, or managers
peering over your shoulder now you ve gone from the bottom all the way to the top. You
are the boss.
 Flexibility: Many people are excited to work for themselves because it means they can work
when they want and where they want. Your commute could be as simple as walking to the
couch or taking a stroll to the local coffee shop.
 Control: Many budding entrepreneurs value control. Getting your own venture off the ground
requires heavy lifting but at the end of the day, it s your dream and you are in control of
making it happen. Having influence over the direction of the company is one of the most
exciting parts of being an entrepreneur.
 Profits: Instead of making others richer, now your profits can slide right into your own
pocket. This means each business success becomes your success, and as your business grows,
so does your potential income. This can be incredibly motivating for many new entrepreneurs
on the path to success.
CONS:
 Responsibility: Not only is the future of your business in your hands but so is your next
paycheck. Moving away from a salaried job to an unstable income is hard. There is great
sacrifice that comes from starting your own business, and while the pay-off may be worth it,
carrying the weight of responsibility can be difficult at first.
 Risk: As the business owner, you will take on much of the risk associated with starting a new
venture. This means, instead of your employer taking the fall, you re often risking your
savings, time and effort to get your business off the ground.
 Workload: It takes serious hustle to get a new business up and running, and for the most part,
you ll be doing all the grunt work especially in the early stages. All the heavy lifting can be
hard for one person to manage. While it can be an exciting time, full of possibility, it can also
be exhausting.

 Limitations: The idea of running your own business can be very different to the reality. From
late nights to lonely weekends, being an entrepreneur is not without its challenges. You can
also find it quite limiting in the early stages, without the funding of a big name or well-
established business behind you.
53. Explain characteristics or qualities of an entrepreneur.
Ans. The characteristics of successful entrepreneurs are as follows
(i) Goal-oriented: Entrepreneur is goal-oriented. Firstly, he sets a goal to achieve, i.e. to earn
profit by producing goods and services and after reaching one goal he proceeds to another goal.
(ii) Highly Optimistic: A successful entrepreneur is always optimistic and is not disturbed by the
present problems faced by him. He is always optimistic that the situation will become favourable
for business in future.
(iii) Trust in Self: An entrepreneur does not believe in luck or fate. He believes in his own firm
decisions and actions. He has trust in his perseverance and creations. He pulls his own strings.
(iv) Leadership: An entrepreneur must possess the characteristics of leadership and must lead a
ream for achievement of goals. The leader is able to clearly articulate their ideas and has a clear
vision.
(v) Innovativeness: With the changing needs and requirements of customers production should
meet requirements with the help in innovative ideas. An entrepreneur does not have to restrict
itself to just one innovation rather he must use combination of innovation.
(vi) Decision-maker: An entrepreneur has to take many decisions to put his business idea into
reality. He chooses the best suitable and profitable alternative.
54. What are the functions of an entrepreneur? Explain.
Ans. The functions of an entrepreneur are as follows
(i) New Inventions: Encouraging new inventions and introducing innovations in production,
production techniques, sales, marketing, advertisement etc.
(ii) Establishing Relations with Government: To establish relations with government and its
functionaries. In this regards his functions are (a) obtaining licences, (b) payment of taxes, (c)
selling the product to government, (d) Provision for export-import etc.
(iii) Size and Scale of Business Unit: To decide about size of business unit, i.e., he wants to
establish one production unit or more etc. which is dependent upon demand of the product.
Similarly, he has to decide about scale of production, i.e., small scale, middle scale or large scale.
(iv) Organisation and Management: An entrepreneur organises and manages various economic
and human factors through planning, coordination, control, supervision and direction.
(v) Factors of Production: Another important function of an entrepreneur is the factors of
production i.e. land, labour, capital etc., should be in right proportion and to maximise output of
these factors is the responsibility of the entrepreneur.
A. MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS.

Q1. Which of the following characteristics should an entrepreneur have?
(a) Innovativeness
(b) Motivator
(c) All of these
Ans. (c) All of these
Q2. Which of the following is a disadvantage of entrepreneurship as a career?

(a) Uncertainty
(b) Independence
(c) Ambition fulfillment
Ans. (a) Uncertainty
Q3. Which of the following are the functions of an entrepreneur?
(a) Innovation
(b) Risk-taking
(c) All of these
Ans. (c) All of these
Q4. Which of the following is an advantage of entrepreneurship as a career?

(a) Risk
(b) Hardwork
(c) None of these
Ans. (c) None of these
Q5. The decision-making function of an entrepreneur includes:

(a) Hardwork
(b) Risk bearing
(c) Utilisation of financial resources
Ans. (c) Utilisation of financial resources
Q6. ’An entrepreneur has to get the work done through others.’ Which characteristic of the
entrepreneur does this statement depict?
(a) Motivator
(b) Organiser
(c) Innovator
Ans. (a) Motivator
B. ANSWER THE FOLLOWING QUESTIONS.

Q1. What is meant by an entrepreneur?
Ans. An entrepreneur is an individual who creates a new business, bearing most of the risks and
enjoying most of the rewards. The entrepreneur is commonly seen as an innovator, a source of new
ideas, goods, services, and business/or procedures.
Q2. State the main characteristics of an entrepreneur.

Ans. Characteristics of an Entrepreneur: Leadership, risk-taking, innovativeness, goal-oriented,
decision-maker, highly optimistic, motivator, self-confident, action-oriented, dynamic agent, high
achiever, trust in self.
Q3. State the functions of an entrepreneur.

Ans. The function of an Entrepreneur: Innovation, risk-taking, decision-making, organization and
management, size and scale of Business unit, the appointment of Managerial and another workforce,
to arrange for factors of production and establishing coordination, Procuring raw material and
machinery, control and direction, finding a suitable market, new inventions, establishing relations
with government, establishing contacts with competitors.
C. SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS.

Q1. Who is an entrepreneur?
Ans. An entrepreneur is an individual who sets up business or businesses, identifies and solves
problems, creative, innovative, opportunist, risk-taker, self-starter, and open-minded with the hope of
making a profit from the enterprise.
Q2. Explain briefly Innovation as characteristics of an entrepreneur.

Ans. Innovativeness: Customer’s requirements and tastes keep on changing, therefore, production
should meet the customer’s requirements. Thus, innovativeness is another important characteristic of
an entrepreneur. He always tries to out strive others by taking initiative in doing new things, i.e.,
exploring new products, new markets, new raw materials, new methods of production, etc.
Q3. Do you think an entrepreneur is innovative by nature? Discuss.

Ans. An innovative entrepreneur is a person who discovers totally new things. An innovative owner
is a person who creates innovative products and services. An innovative entrepreneur is a person who
innovates the business processes in his business. An innovative person is a person who is not afraid to
take a risk.
Q4. Do you think an entrepreneur is a leader? Discuss.

Ans. An entrepreneur essentially a leader. According to K.L. Sharma, a psychologist, entrepreneurs
are men who exhibit qualities of leadership in solving problems. They have to lead a team for the
achievement of goals. Thus, an entrepreneur must have all universally accepted qualities of a leader,
i.e., initiative, high energy level, self-confidence, human relations skills, motivational skills,
creativity, and keen desire to solve problems.
Q5. Give two advantages of entrepreneurship as a career.

Ans. Advantages of Entrepreneurship as a Career: Independence, ambition fulfillment, excitement,
freedom, wealth creation, and status.
Q6. State two disadvantages of entrepreneurship as a career.

Ans. Disadvantages of Entrepreneurship as a Career: Risk, hard work, uncertain income, the problem
of finance, and incompetent staff.
D. Long answer questions.

Q1. Write an essay on the qualities of an entrepreneur.
Ans. Qualities/characteristics of a successful entrepreneur: The success of small enterprises and
their growth to leading industrial houses can be attributed to entrepreneurs themselves. Thus, it is
important to understand the success story of such entrepreneurs. There are definitely some common
personal characteristics in entrepreneurs. After carefully scanning the qualities/characteristics of such
entrepreneurs the principal ones were noticed, which are as follows:
1. Leadership: An entrepreneur essentially a leader. According to K.L. Sharma, a psychologist,
entrepreneurs are men who exhibit qualities of leadership in solving problems. They have to lead a
team for the achievement of goals. Thus, an entrepreneur must have all universally accepted qualities
of a leader, i.e., initiative, high energy level, self-confidence, human relations skills, motivational
skills, creativity, and keen desire to solve problems.
2. Risk-taking: business risks are unpredictable but still an entrepreneur, with rational planning and
firm decisions, bears the risks. An entrepreneur innovates an idea and undertakes the risk of
commercially exploiting that idea by investing his funds because he recognizes the fact that - the
higher the risk, the greater is the profit.
3. Innovativeness: Customer’s requirements and tastes keep on changing, therefore, production
should meet the customer’s requirements. Thus, innovativeness is another important characteristic of
an entrepreneur. He always tries to out strive others by taking initiative in doing new things, i.e.,
exploring new products, new markets, new raw materials, new methods of production, etc.
4. Goal-oriented: The entrepreneur is goal-oriented. First, he sets a goal to achieve, i.e., to earn profit
by producing goods and services, and after reaching one goal he proceeds to another goal.
5. Decision-maker: The entrepreneur is regarded as a decision-maker. He has to take many
decisions to put his business idea into reality. He recognizes an idea i.e., a product, service, or
market, and out of various alternatives before the time he has to make a choice between them. This
involves decision-making to choose the best suitable and profitable alternative.
6. Motivator: An entrepreneur has to get the work done through others. Hy has to create a spirit of
teamwork and motivate them so that he gets wholehearted cooperation.

7. Self-confident: An entrepreneur should have self-confidence in achieving his goals, otherwise he
will not be able to convince his fellow beings to achieve his goals.
Q2. Define ’entrepreneur’. What are the various functions of an entrepreneur?

Ans. Entrepreneur: An entrepreneur is an individual who creates a new business, bearing most of
the risks and enjoying most of the rewards. The entrepreneur is commonly seen as an innovator, a
source of new ideas, goods, services, and business/or procedures.
The various functions of an entrepreneur may be classified and described as under
1. Innovation: It includes (a) Introducing new products, (b) Opening new markers (c) New sources
of raw material, and (d) New organization structure.
2. Risk-taking: Choosing one among various alternatives, the end results of which are unpredictable.
3. Decision making: Includes: (a) Stabilising organization’s aims and objective and changing them
according to changing conditions or to make the most profitable, (b) Division of work among
subordinates, (c) Utilisation of financial resources, (d) Taking decisions on effective techniques, (e)
Selling the produced as per the demand of customers, (f) Relationship with social functionaries.
4. Organisation and management: To organize and manage various economic human factors.
Under this category, the following are his functions: (a) Planning the enterprise, (b) Coordination and
control, (c) Supervision, and (d) Direction
5. Size and scale of business unit: To decide about the size of a business unit, i.e. wants to establish
one production unit or more, etc. which is dependent on the demand of the product. Similarly, he has
to decide about the scale of productivity i.e, small scale, middle scale, or large scale.
6. Appointment of managerial and another workforce.
7. To arrange for factors of production and establishing coordination, i.e., land, labor, capital, etc. in
appropriate proportion and to maximize output by best utilization of these factors after coordinating
them.
Q3. Discuss the importance of entrepreneurship.

Ans. Role and Significance / Importance of Entrepreneur: Enterprising man, great achievers,
reinvesting organizations, job creation, first movers, higher productivity, visionary leader, economic
prosperity, the backbone of the capitalist system, protector of society’s interest, catalytic agent, an
ingredient of a modern production system.
Q4. State five myths of entrepreneurship.

’OR’
What are the myths about entrepreneurship?
Ans. Myths of entrepreneurship
1. It is easy to start a business: In reality, starting a successful business is a very difficult and
challenging process. The rate of failure of new ventures is high. Even after a period of seven years,
only one-third of the enterprises are profitable. However, it is relatively easy to start a very small
business than a large company.
2. Lot of money is needed to start a new business: A business can be started with limited money.
For example, Infosys Technology was started with only 10,000. In the beginning, you can hire space
and equipment.
3. A Startup cannot borrow from banks: Under various schemes like MUDRA, budding
entrepreneurs also can raise loans from banks.
4. Talent is more important than an industry: The nature of the industry an entrepreneur chooses
has a great effect on success and growth. For example, if you enter an industry wherein competition is
cutthroat or materials are scarce, you may fail.
5. Most startups are successful: A large percentage of startups fail. The average profit of an owner-
managed firm is 20,000 per month. A very few entrepreneurs earn more than employees.
Q5. Describe six advantages of entrepreneurship as a career.

Ans. The main advantages of adopting entrepreneurship as a career are as follows:
1. Independence: An entrepreneur is his own boss. He can take all decisions himself. He need not
obey someone.
2. Ambition - Fulfilment: Some people want to convert their original ideas into a new product or
service, for example, smartphones, electric vehicles, driverless trains, etc.
3. Excitement: Entrepreneurship involves adventure. Some people resign from their well-paid jobs
and launch their own venture due to excitement.
4. Freedom: Entrepreneurship allows the freedom to try out one’s ideas. Freedom-seeking people
choose entrepreneurship as a career.
5. Wealth Creation: Successful entrepreneurs create enormous wealth for themselves and their staff.
6. Status: Success in entrepreneurship brings considerable fame and prestige. Narayana Murthy,
Sunil Mittal, Rana Kapoor, Subhash Chandra, and other successful entrepreneurs are known all over
the world.
Q6. Describe five disadvantages of entrepreneurship as a career.

Ans. Disadvantages of Entrepreneurship as a Career:
1. Risk: Entrepreneurship involves a considerable risk of loss. Failure can wipe away all the personal
savings and lead to a considerable debt - burden.
2. Hard Work: An entrepreneur has to work very hard to make the new business successful. His
work schedule is unpredictable and he has to work late hours. Spouse and children may have to suffer
due to his very busy work schedule.
3. Uncertain Income: No fixed and regular income is available to an entrepreneur. During the startup
stage, it may be difficult even to meet household expenses.
4. Problem of Finance: Raising the necessary funds is very difficult for a first-generation
entrepreneur.
5. Incompetent Staff: A new entrepreneur may not be able to hire and retain qualified and
experienced employees. The administrative burden is heavy and faulty decisions can be very harmful
to the business.
Q1. What do you mean by Entrepreneurship ?

Ans. Entrepreneurship is the type of self-employment where one is running a business and looking
for ways to make the business better to make profits.
Q2. Write four qualities of successful Entrepreneur?

Ans. Four qualities of successful Entrepreneur are :
a) They are confident.
b) They keep trying new ideas in their business.
c) They take responsibility for their actions.
d) They do not give up when they face a difficulty.
Q3. What is the difference between Wage employed and Self employed people?
Ans. Wage employed people are people who work for a person or an organization and get paid for
that work. Self-employed people are those who start businesses to satisfy the needs of people.
Q4. What do you mean by Entrepreneur?

Ans. A self employed person who is always trying to make his/her business better by taking risks and
trying new ideas is an entrepreneur.

Q5. Ramya and Ramu both own plant shops. Ramu sits at his shop every day. When customers come,
he sells to them. Ramya walks around and gets customers to her shop. She also sells seeds and
flowers with her plants. Who is Entrepreneur out of Ramya and Ramu and why?
Ans. Ramya is entrepreneur as she is working to grow her business. She has also added a different
idea to her business.
Q6. Bharti is a young woman from Bihar. Many girls in her area like to wear earrings. She buys jute
from a farmer and makes earrings from that. Her business is called Manavi Natural Handicrafts. She
sees that most women in her village do not work. So, she hires two women to help them.
Read the above paragraph and answer the following questions.
1) What demand did Bharti identify in her village?
(a) People in her village wanted Jute
(b) Girls in her area liked to wear earrings
(c) The villagers wanted more water
Ans. (b) Girls in her area liked to wear earrings
2) What is the local resource that Bharti used?

(a) Jute
(b) Water
(c) Sand
Ans. (a) Jute
3) How is Bharti helping her village grow?

(a) By buying jute from the local farmer who can now earn more money
(b) By providing jobs to local women
(c) Both (a) and (b
Ans. (c) Both (a) and (b)
4) How was she creating more jobs?

(a) By selling earrings to women without a job
(b) By buying jute from the local farmer
(c) By providing jobs to local women
Ans. (c) By providing jobs to local women
Q7. Write four functions of an Entrepreneur.

Ans. Four functions of an Entrepreneur are:
1 Making Decisions.
2. Managing the Business.
3. Taking Risk.
4. Create new method, Idea or Product
Q8. Write four Misconceptions about Entrepreneurship.

Ans. Four Misconceptions about Entrepreneurship are :
a) Every business idea needs to be unique or special.
b) A person needs a lot of money to start a business.
c) A person having a big business is an entrepreneur.
d) Entrepreneurs are born, not made.
Q9. Match each story below with the misconception about entrepreneurship.
NOTE : Answers are matched in same color
Story Misconception
Ramu owns a large clothes shop. Shamu has a small (a) Every business idea needs
store selling handmade sarees. Shamu does not call to be unique or special.
himself an entrepreneur.
Anna has a great idea for a website. She has 5,000. She is (b) Entrepreneurs are born,
waiting for 20,000 more, so that she can start it. not made.
In a city of thousands of tailoring shops, Gauri is a tailor who (c) A person needs to have a
stitches good quality clothes and has a very successful business. big business to be called an
entrepreneur.
Q10. Write against the option, if the business idea is of self-employment or wage employment.
(a) Cooking in a restaurant Wage employment
(b) Owning a clothing business Self-employment
(c) Having a dosa selling stall Self-employment
(d) Doctor working in Hospital Wage employment
(e) Doctor has his/her own clinic Self-employment
Q11. Match the condition with entrepreneur Career Process Phase (Enter, Survive, Grow)
1. Surabhi opens 5 painting stores across India Enter
2. There are many coaching classes in Mumbai. Jacob owns one of them. Survive
He is starting morning batches to attract more students to his classes
3. Salma has started her clothing line on the Internet. Grow
Ans: 1 Grow, 2 Survive and 3 - Enter
Q12. Match the condition with entrepreneur Career Process Phase (Enter, Survive, Grow)
1. After five years, Sanjana has opened a chain of four Enter
more grocery stores in the same city
2. Sanjana is starting a small grocery store in a locality. Survive
3. There are many other grocery stores in the area. Grow
Yet, Sanjana s store survives the competition and does well
Ans: 1 Grow, 2 Enter and 3 - Survive
Q13. Here are some stories of some entrepreneurs. Tick the option for the quality they are showing.
(1) Ravi s customer comes to his store and starts shouting at him. He does not get angry. He listens to
what his customer is saying. He is ______________.
(a) hardworking
(b) confident
(c) patient
(d) trying new ideas
Ans. (c) Patient
(2) Susheela decides to sell her company s product in Sri Lanka. It does not sell and she has a loss.
She apologizes to the people who work for her. She says she will plan better next time.
She ___________.
(a) takes responsibility for your mistakes
(d) is creative
Ans. (c) does not give up
Q14. Tick the correct option for the function that the entrepreneur is doing.
(1) Ali has a diamond factory. He pays his employees on the 1st of every month.

(a) Creates a new product
(b) Manages the business
(c) Takes risk
Ans. (b) Manages the business
(2) Mary buys bulbs for her business from Noida. She learns that bulbs are cheaper in Faridabad. So,
she decides to start buying bulbs from there.
(a) Makes decisions
(b) Divides income
(c) Takes risk
Ans. (a) Makes decisions
(3) Rehnuma has two people who work for her. Every day, she spends one hour with them to learn
about what
they ve done that day.
(a) Creates a new product
(b) Divides income
(c) Manages the business
Ans. (c) Manages the business
Q15. State whether the following statements are True or False

1 Entrepreneurs can create jobs in the market.
Ans. True
2. When many entrepreneurs sell mobile phones in a market, the prices of phones increase.
Ans. False
3. Entrepreneurs identify a need in the market and build a product or service for it.
Ans. True
4. Entrepreneurs who do not have an innovative idea cannot succeed.
Ans. True
5. Entrepreneurs exhibit high risk-taking ability, but they take calculative risks.
Ans. True
6. Nothing matters more than the business idea.
Ans. False
7. Any one can acquire and develop entrepreneurial skills.
Ans. True
8. Entrepreneurship is a process of constant learning.
Ans. True
Ans. True
Q16. Write four positive impact of Entrepreneurship on society.

Ans. Four positive impact of Entrepreneurship on society. (Write any four )
1. Accentuates economic Growth
2. Stimulates Innovation and Efficiency
3. Creates Jobs and Employment Opportunities
4. Solves the problems of the society
5. Encourages welfare of the society
Q17. Entrepreneur plays an important role in ____________ of Society

a. making
b. evolving
c. growing
d. None of the above.
Ans. c. growing
Q18. Entrepreneur is/are _________________
a. Risk taker
b. Hard Working
c. Innovative
d. All of the above
Ans. d. All of the above
Q19. Write any two disadvantages of Entrepreneurship as a career.

Ans. Two disadvantages of Entrepreneurship as a career are :
1. No Fixed income
2. Problem of generating finance in the beginning of career.
Q20. Entrepreneur is a _________ of growing society.

a. builder
b. destroyer
c. citizen
Ans. a. builder
Q21. ____________ is not the characteristics of entrepreneur.

a. Hard Work
b. Lazy
c. Decision Maker
Ans. b. Lazy
Q22. How entrepreneurs help in growing the area and society?

Ans. Entrepreneurs run their businesses in a market. The market has people who buy products and
services and people who sell them also. When people are buying and selling from each other, it is
helpful for everyone because everyone involved makes money. This is how entrepreneurs help in
growing the area and society.
Q23. Entrepreneurs also ___________ (increasing / decreasing) jobs in the society.

Ans. increasing
1. What is entrepreneurship?
Answer : Entrepreneurship is simply described as starting a business using the resources available to
a person.
An entrepreneur combines factors in a creative manner in order to generate value for customers and
create wealth.
2. What is Society?
Answer : Society is described as an aggregate of people living together in a community, who
associate for various engagements including business.
3. What is the beauty of entrepreneurship in a society?

Answer: The beauty of entrepreneurship in a society is that, as businesses prosper the impact the
businesses create also increases.
It is due to entrepreneurial activity that society is provided with goods and services.
4. How society is related to the entrepreneur?
Answer : There is a direct relationship between the entrepreneur and society. Society provides
market for products and services provided by the Entrepreneur.
5. Write the positive impact of Entrepreneurship on society.

Answer: Entrepreneurship has some positive impacts on society. These are:
Accentuates Economic Growth
Fosters Creativity
Stimulates Innovation and Efficiency
Creates Jobs and Employment Opportunities
Solves the problems of the society
Encourages welfare of the society
6. How is society boosting entrepreneurship?

Answer: Society plays a role in boosting entrepreneurship by:
Creates needs and demands
Provides raw materials
Enables financial support
Creates a need for education
Catalyses policy formation and reform
Facilitates networking
Supports infrastructure development
7. What adverse impact is created by entrepreneurship on society?

Answer : Adverse impacts created by entrepreneurship on society are
(a) environmental degradation,
(b) trade imbalance,
(c) labour exploitation, etc.
8. How does entrepreneurs and entrepreneurship contributes to society?

Answer : Entrepreneurs and entrepreneurship contributes to society are
(i) Entrepreneurship Creates Jobs,
(ii) Entrepreneurship helps raise the standard of living,
(iii) Successful entrepreneurs as Role models generate more entrepreneurship
(iv) Community / Society Development
9. How entrepreneurship contributes to a country s economy?

Answer : Entrepreneurship contributes to the country s economy are:-
(i) Entrepreneurship creates wealth
(ii) Contribute to the growth of the overall economy by stimulating the growth of related businesses,
(iii) Regional Development,
(iv) GDP and Per Capita income,
(v) Exports
10. How entrepreneurship contributes to an Individual?

Answer: Entrepreneurship contributes to an Individual s are
(i) Gives Independence and Freedom to set your own schedule.
(ii) Gives flexibility to work
(iii) Makes one own boss,
(iv) Earns individual much respect.
11. What is Social Entrepreneurship?

Answer : Social entrepreneurship develops a sustainable solution for social problems that leads to
social change by employing entrepreneurial mindset, processes and operations.
Many social problems are tackled by social entrepreneurs such as the low reach of quality education,
health, and sanitation, unemployment, child labour etc.
12. What is Agricultural Entrepreneurship?

Answer : Agricultural Entrepreneurship is related to the marketing and producing inputs and
products used in agricultural activities.
13. How farmers are benefited by Agricultural Entrepreneurship?

Answer : Farmers have benefited the most with rise in agricultural entrepreneurship as it has led to
low-cost innovations in farming processes.
14. What is Women Entrepreneurship?

Answer : The entrepreneurial activity led by women, where women undertake risks, create
enterprises, organise factors of production, innovate with products/services and generate employment
opportunities, is called Women Entrepreneurship.
15. According to the Govt. of India, what is Women Entrepreneurship?

Answer : According to the Govt. of India, an enterprise owned and controlled by a woman having
a minimum financial interest of 51 per cent of the capital and giving at least 51 per cent of the
employment generated in the enterprise to women. , called Women Entrepreneurship.
16. What is Small Scale Entrepreneurship?

Answer : Small scale entrepreneurship refers to starting industries in which manufacturing, trading,
providing services, productions are done on a small scale or micro scale.
These businesses serve as the backbone of many developing countries.
17. What are the qualities of a successful Entrepreneur?

Answer: Successful entrepreneurs have the following qualities.
 They are confident.
 They believe in themselves and their abilities.
 They keep trying new ideas in their business.
 They are patient.
 They are creative and think differently about business ideas.
 They take responsibility for their actions.
 They take decisions after thinking about them.
 They work hard.
 They do not give up when they face a difficulty
18. What are the qualities of an Entrepreneur?

Answer: An Entrepreneur has the following qualities:-
 (i) Hard Work,
 (ii) Optimism,
 (iii) Independence,
 (iv) Energetic,
 (v) Self-confident,
 (vi) Perseverant
19. How many hours do successful entrepreneurs work?

 Answer: On average, successful entrepreneurs are found to be working anywhere between 60
to 90 hours per week.

20. Does an Entrepreneur like to work under anyone else?
 Answer: No,
They prefer to be their own master and not work under someone else. Entrepreneurs like the
independence to drive a business on their own.
21. What are the functions of an Entrepreneur?

Answer: An Entrepreneur has the following qualities :-
 (i) Entrepreneurial functions,
 (ii) Promotional functions,
 (iii) Managerial functions.
 (iv) Commercial functions
22. What are the Entrepreneurial functions of an Entrepreneur?

Answer: Entrepreneurial functions of an Entrepreneur are:-
 (a) Organisation Building and Management
 (b) Risk-Taking
 (c) Innovation
23. What are the Promotional functions of an Entrepreneur?

Answer: Promotional functions of an Entrepreneur are:-
(a) Idea Discovery
(b) Detailed Investigation
(c) Assembling the Requirements
(d) Financing
24. What are the Managerial functions of an Entrepreneur?

Answer: Managerial functions of an Entrepreneur are:-
 (a) Planning
 (b) Organizing
 (c) Directing
 (d) Staffing
 (e) Leadership
 (f) Communication
 (g) Supervision
 (h) Motivation
 (i) Co-ordination
 (j) Controlling
 (k) Negotiation
25. What are the Commercial functions of an Entrepreneur?

Answer: Commercial functions of an Entrepreneur are:-
(a) Production and Operations
(b) Finance and Accounting
(c) Marketing
(d) Human Resource Management
26. What are the different roles of an Entrepreneur?

Answer: An entrepreneur can be in the following role:
 (i) Innovator s Role
 (ii) Agent s role
 (iii) Coordinating role
 (iv) Risk assumption role
 (v) Capital formation role

 (vi) Imitating role
 (vii) Employment Generation role
 (viii) Satus transformation role
 (ix) Balancing role
27. What do you mean by an Innovator s role of an Entrepreneur?

Answer: Entrepreneurs innovate by bringing unique and new products and services into the market.
In many cases, these are improved versions of existing products or services available. Innovation
fuels economic growth and helps to boost the global presence of products and services.
28. Entrepreneurs act as Agents of change .

Explain the above statement.
Answer: Entrepreneurs act as Agents of Change as they identify opportunities, solve problems,
offer effective solutions, establish enterprises, set up industries, and bring positive change for the
economy.

COMMUNICATION SKILLS II
REVISION NOTES
COMMUNICATION SKILLS
It is a process which involves sharing of information, opinion, ideas, and beliefs between two or more
persons through a continuous activity of speaking, listening and understanding.
The word ‘communication’ comes from the Latin word commūnicāre, meaning ‘to share’.
PARTS OF COMMUNICATION
Communication has three important parts:

1. Transmitting The sender transmits the message through one medium or another.
2. Listening The receiver listens or understands the message.
3. Feedback The receiver conveys their understanding of the message to the sender in the form of
feedback to complete the communication cycle.
ELEMENTS OF A COMMUNICATION
The various elements of a communication cycle are:

 Sender: the person beginning the communication.
 Message: the information that the sender wants to convey.
 Channel: the means by which the information is sent.
 Receiver: the person to whom the message is sent.
 Feedback: the receiver s acknowledgement and response to the message.

METHODS OF COMMUNICATION
Method Description Pictorial Description

Face-to-face There is nothing better than face-to-face
communication.
It helps the message to be understood clearly
and quickly.
Also, since body language can be seen in
this case; it adds to the effectiveness of the
communication.
E-mail E-mail can be used to communicate quickly

with one or many individuals in various
locations.
It offers flexibility, convenience and low-
cost.
Notices/Posters It is effective when the same message has to

go out to a large group of people.
Generally used for where email
communication may not be effective.
For example, Change in the lunch time for
factory worker, or XYZ Clothing will
remain closed for customers on Sunday.
Business Communication during business meetings at

Meetings an organisation are generally addressed to a
group of people.
It can be related to business, management
and organisational decisions.
Other There can be various other methods like

Methods social networks, message, phone call for
communication, newsletter, blog, etc.

VERBAL COMMUNICATION
Verbal communication includes sounds, words, language, and speech. Speaking is one of the most
effective and commonly used way of communicating. It helps in expressing our emotions in words.
Types of Verbal Communication
Type of Verbal Description

Communication
Interpersonal This form of communication takes place between two individuals and is
Communication thus a one-on-one conversation. It can be formal or informal.
Examples
1. A manager discussing the performance with an employee.
2. Two friends discussing homework.
3. Two people talking to each other over phone or video call.
Written This form of communication involves writing words. It can be letters,
Communication circulars, reports, manuals, SMS, social media chats, etc. It can be between
two or more people.
Examples
1. A manager writing an appreciation e-mail to an employee.
2. Writing a letter to grandmother enquiring about health.
Small Group This type of communication takes place when there are more than two
Communication people involved. Each participant can interact and converse with the rest.
Examples
1. Press conferences
2. Board meetings
3. Team meetings
Public This type of communication takes place when one individual addresses a
Communication large gathering.
Examples
1. Election campaigns
2. Public speeches by dignitaries
Advantages of Verbal Communication

 It is an easy mode of communication in which you can exchange ideas by saying what you want
and get a quick response.
 Verbal communication also enables you to keep changing your interaction as per the other
person s response.
Disadvantages of Verbal Communication

Since verbal communication depends on written or spoken words, sometimes the meanings can be
confusing and difficult to understand if the right words are not used.
NON-VERBAL COMMUNICATION
Non-verbal communication is the expression or exchange of information or messages without using

any spoken or written word.
In other words, we send signals and messages to others, through expressions, gestures, postures,
touch, space, eye contact and para language.
Importance of Non-verbal Communication

In our day-to-day communication
55% communication is done using body movements, face, arms, etc.
38% communication is done using voice, tone, pauses, etc.
only 7% communication is done using words.
Non-Verbal Communication Example

Gestures 1. Raising a hand to greet or say goodbye
2. Pointing your finger at someone
Expressions 1. Smiling when you are happy
2. Making a sad face when you are sad
Body Language Postures by which attitudes and feelings are
communicated. Standing straight, showing interest.
TYPES OF NON-VERBAL COMMUNICATION
Type What it means How to use effectively?

Facial Our expressions can show different Smile when you meet someone.
Expressions feelings, such as Happiness, Sadness, Keep your face relaxed.
Anger, Surprise, Fear, etc. Match your expressions with your
words.
Nod while listening.
Posture Postures show our confidence and Keep your shoulders straight and
feelings. For example, a straight body body relaxed.
posture shows confidence while a Sit straight while resting your hands
slumped posture is a sign of weakness. and feet in relaxed position.
While standing, keep your hands by
your sides.
Gestures or Gestures include body movements that Keep your hands open.
Body Language express an idea or meaning. For Avoid pointing your finger at people.
example, raising a hand in class to ask Tilt your head a bit to show that you
a question and biting nails when are attentive.
nervous.
Touch We communicate a great deal through Shake hands firmly while meeting
touch. For example, a firm handshake someone.
to display confidence and pat on the Avoid other touch gestures during
back to encourage someone. formal communication.
Space Space is the physical distance between Maintain proper space depending on
two people. The space between tow the relationship, which could be
persons while communicating, formal or informal or the closeness
generally depends on the intimacy or with the person with whom you are
closeness between them. talking.
Eye Contact The way we look at someone can Look directly at the person who is
communicate a lot. Eye contact shows speaking.
that we are paying attention to the Avoid staring; keep a relaxed look.
person as opposed to looking away, Maintain eye contact with
which can make the other person feel intermittent breaks.
ignored.
Paralanguage How we speak affects our Use a suitable tone and volume
communication and includes the tone, Maintain a moderate speed while
speed and volume of our voice. For talking
example, talking fast may show
happiness, excitement or nervousness
while speaking slow may show
seriousness or sadness.

VISUAL COMMUNICATION
Visual communication proves to be effective since it involves interchanging messages only through
images or pictures and therefore, you do not need to know any particular language for understanding
it. It is simple and remains consistent across different places.
Examples of Visual Communication
COMMUNICATION CYCLE AND IMPORTANCE OF FEEDBACK
Feedback is an important part of the communication cycle. For effective communication, it is

important that the sender receives an acknowledgement from the receiver about getting the message
across.
While a sender sends information, the receiver provides feedback on the received message.
Translated to the work environment, when you observe someone perform their work and then,
communicate with them to help improve their performances, you are giving feedback.

TYPES OF FEEDBACK
Type of Feedback Examples

Positive Feedback I noticed you finished the work perfectly. Great job!
I really appreciate you taking that call. Can you please also share the details?
Negative Feedback You keep forgetting to smile at the hotel guests when you talk to them.
You take really long to reply to e-mails! Are you always so busy?
No Feedback It is also a feedback in itself which indicates disagreement of ideas.
A good feedback is one that is:

Specific: Avoid general comments. Try to include examples to clarify your statement. Offering
alternatives rather than just giving advice allows the receiver to decide what to do with your
feedback.
Timely: Being prompt is the key, since feedback loses its impact if delayed for too long.
Polite: While it is important to share feedback, the recipient should not feel offended by the
language of the feedback.
Offering continuing support: Feedback sharing should be a continuous process. After offering
feedback, let recipients know you are available for support.
IMPORTANCE OF FEEDBACK
Feedback is the final component and one of the most important factors in the process of
communication since it is defined as the response given by the receiver to the sender. Let us look at
certain reasons why feedback is important.
It validates effective listening: The person providing the feedback knows they have been
understood (or received) and that their feedback provides some value.
It motivates: Feedback can motivate people to build better work relationships and continue the
good work that is being appreciated.
It is always there: Every time you speak to a person, we communicate feedback so it is
impossible not to provide one.
It boosts learning: Feedback is important to remain focussed on goals, plan better and develop
improved products and services.
It improves performance: Feedback can help to form better decisions to improve and increase
performance.
7Cs of Effective Communication

BARRIERS TO EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION
Some common barriers to effective communication include:
Physical Barriers:
Physical barrier is the environmental and natural condition that act as a barrier in communication in
sending message from sender to receiver. Not being able to see gestures, posture and general body
language can make communication less effective.
For example, text messages are often less effective than face-to-face communication.
Linguistic Barriers
The inability to communicate using a language is known as language barrier to communication.
Language barriers are the most common communication barriers, which cause misunderstandings and
misinterpretations between people.
For example, slang, professional jargon and regional colloquialisms can make communication
difficult.
Interpersonal Barriers
Barriers to interpersonal communication occur when the sender s message is received differently
from how it was intended. It is also very difficult to communicate with someone who is not willing to
talk or express their feelings and views.
Stage fear, lack of will to communicate, personal differences can create interpersonal barriers to
communication.
Organisational Barriers
Organisations are designed on the basis of formal hierarchical structures that follow performance
standards, rules and regulations, procedures, policies, behavioural norms, etc. All these affect the free
flow of communication in organisations and therefore, need to be suitably managed.
For example, Superior-subordinate relationships in a formal organisational structure can be a barrier
to free flow of communication.
Cultural Barriers
Cultural barriers is when people of different cultures are unable to understand each other s customs,
resulting in inconveniences and difficulties. People sometimes make stereotypical assumptions about
others based on their cultural background, this leads to difference in opinions and can be a major
barrier to effective communication.
Ways to Overcome Barriers to Effective Communication

Use simple language
Do not form assumptions on culture, religion or geography

Try to communicate in person as much as possible
Use visuals
Take help of a translator to overcome differences in language
Be respectful of other s opinions
WRITING SKILLS PARTS OF SPEECH

Writing skills are part of verbal communication and include e-mails, letters, notes, articles, SMS/chat,
blogs, etc.
In all these forms of written communication, we use sentences to express ourselves. Sentences are
important because they help to clearly present the message.
A sentence always begins with a capital letter, and it always ends with a question mark, full stop or
exclamation mark.
CAPITALISATION
We know that all sentences begin with capital letters. However, there are certain other points in a
sentence where we should use capital letters. TINS is a set of simple rules that help you capitalise
words correctly. Each letter in the word TINS refers to one capitalisation rule as shown in below
Table
PUNCTUATION
Certain set of marks, such as full stop, comma, question mark, exclamation mark and apostrophe are
used in communication to separate parts of a sentence for better clarity of message. Some common
punctuation marks and their rules are shown here in Table

BASIC PARTS OF SPEECH
The part of speech indicates how a particular word functions in meaning as well as grammatically
within the sentence. Some examples are nouns, pronouns, adjectives, verbs and adverbs as shown in
Figure
Supporting Parts of Speech Types
WRITING SKILLS SENTENCES

Parts of a Sentence
We all know that almost all English sentences have a subject and a verb while some also have an
object.
Subject: Person or thing that performs an action.
Verb: Describes the action.
Object: Person or thing that receives the action.

Examples:
Types of Objects
In a sentence, there can be two types of objects Direct
and Indirect.
The objects provided in the above examples are called direct objects since they are directly acted on
by the verb.
On the other hand, an indirect object answers questions, such as to/ for who.
TYPES OF SENTENCES
Active and Passive Sentences
1. Radha is reading a book.
2. A book is being read by Radha.
The action (verb) in both sentences is reading a book. But the subject of both sentences is different.
In the first sentence, the subject (Radha) does the action. In the second sentence, the subject (a book)
receives the action.
Sentences where the subject does an action are known to be in the Active voice, whereas sentences in
which the subject receives an action are known to be in the Passive voice.
Examples

COMMUNICATION SKILLS II
A. Multiple choice questions

Read the questions carefully and circle the letter (a), (b), (c) or (d) that best answers the question.
1. Which of the following is NOT an element of communication within the communication process
cycle?
(a) Channel (b) Receiver (c) Sender (d) Time
Ans: (d) Time
2. You need to apply leave at work? Which method of communication will you use?
(a) e-mail (b) Poster (c) Newsletter (d) Blog
Ans: (a) e-mail
3. By which action can senders send their messages?

(a) Gestures (b) Speaking (c) Reading (d) Writing
Ans: (c) Reading
4. Which of the following is an example of oral

communication?
(a) Newspapers (b) Letters (c) Phone call (d) e-mail
Ans: (c) Phone call
5. What are the types of words we should use for

verbal communication?
(a) Acronyms (b) Simple (c) Technical (d) Jargons
Ans: (b) Simple
6. Why do we use e-mails?

(a) To communicate with many people at the same time.
(b) To share documents and files.
(c) To talk to each other in real-time.
(d) To keep a record of communication.
Ans: (b) To share documents and files.
7. Which of these is a positive (good) facial expression?

(a) Frowning while concentrating (b) Maintaining eye contact
(c) Smiling continuously (d) Rolling up your eyes
Ans: (b) Maintaining eye contact
8. What does an upright (straight) body posture convey or show?

(a) Pride (b) Professionalism (c) Confidence (d) Humility
Ans: (c) Confidence
9. Which of these is NOT an appropriate non-verbal communication at work?

(a) Keeping hands in pockets while talking (b) Talking at moderate speed
(c) Sitting straight (d) Tilting head a bit to listen
Ans: (a) Keeping hands in pockets while talking
10. Which of the following statement is true about communication?

(a) 50% of our communication is non-verbal

(b) 20% communication is done using body movements, face, arms, etc.
(c) 5% communication is done using voice, tone, pauses, etc.
(d) 7% communication is done using words
Ans: (d) 7% communication is done using words
11. Which of these are examples of positive feedback?

(a) Excellent, your work has improved.
(b) I noticed your dedication towards the project.
(c) You are always doing it the wrong way.
Ans: (a) Excellent, your work has improved.
12. Which of these are examples of negative feedback?

(a) I hate to tell you this but your drawing skills are poor.
(b) You can surely improve your drawing.
(c) This is a good drawing but you can do better.
Ans: (a) I hate to tell you this but your drawing skills are poor.
13. Which of the following are effective components of a good feedback?

(a) Detailed and time consuming (b) Direct and honest
(c) Specific (d) Opinion-based
Ans: (c) Specific
14. Which of these is NOT a common communication barrier?

(a) Linguistic barrier (b) Interpersonal barrier
(c) Financial barrier (d) Organisational barrier
Ans: (c) Financial barrier
15. Which of these are ways to overcome communication barriers?

(a) Respecting each other s differences (b) Using a translator
(c) Not communicating at all (d) Using your own language for comfort
Ans: (b) Using a translator
16. In which of the following, the underlined word is an adjective?

(a) Radha has a red dress. (b) I can speak French.
(c) The Girl on the Train is a best-seller. (d) Abdul can swim fast.
Ans: (d) Abdul can swim fast.
17. Which of these sentences is capitalised correctly?

(a) Ravi and i are going to the movies.
(b) Salim is visiting India in july.
(c) The Tiger is a strong animal.
(d) She is arriving on Monday.
Ans: (d) She is arriving on Monday.
18. Which of these sentences are punctuated correctly?

(a) When is the party.
(b) I had bread omelette and a Banana for breakfast.
(c) I am so excited about my first foreign trip!
(d) This is Abdul s notebook.
Ans: (d) This is Abdul s notebook.

19. In which of these sentences can you find an adverb?
(a) Divya drinks milk every day. (b) Sanjay gifted me a new pen.
(c) I opened the door lock. (d) Sita is 5-feet tall.
Ans: (a) Divya drinks milk every day.
20. Identify the object, verb and subject in the sentence,

The car crashed into a tree.
(a) Object: a tree; Verb: crashed; Subject: the car
(b) Object: The car; Verb: crashed; Subject: a tree
(c) Object: crashed; Verb: the tree; Subject: the car
(d) Object: crashed; Verb: the car; Subject: the tree
Ans: (a) Object: a tree; Verb: crashed; Subject: the car
21. Identify the indirect object in the sentence, The band played music for the audience.
(a) The band (b) played (c) music (d) audience
Ans: (d) audience
22. Which of these is an imperative sentence?

(a) Switch off the fan.
(b) Sheila has gone to the market.
(c) Where are my pen colours?
(d) Oh no! I missed my flight.
Ans: (d) Oh no! I missed my flight.
23. Which of these sentences is in active voice?

(a) A movie is being watched by them.
(b) The car was repaired by Raju.
(c) He is reading a book.
(d) The thief was being chased by a policeman.
Ans: (c) He is reading a book.
MCQs QUESTIONS (Set 02)
1. Which of the following is not an advantage of verbal communication?

(a) Communication is interactive (b) Requires proximity
(c) Instant feedback (d) Quick way to communicate
2. A _________________ feedback follows a pre-set format using which the receiver frames
feedback and sends.
(a) informal (b) descriptive (c) formal (d) non-descriptive
3. Lack of confidence makes communication difficult for some people. This is an example of which
type of barrier in communication.
(a) Personal factors (b) Past experiences
(c) Prejudice (d) Environmental factors
4. My father has gifted me a new smart phone. Identify the type of sentence.
(a) Assertive (b) Imperative (c) Exclamatory (d) None of these
5. _____________ is a part of the predicate. It tells about the things being acted by upon the verb.
(a) Subject (b) Predicate (c) Object (d) Adverb

6. Could I have __________ milk in my tea, please?
(a) a little (b) a few (c) much (d) several
7. Which of the following is not a type of written communication?

(a) Newsletter (b) Media release (c) Manuals (d) Illustrations
8. _____________ is the important aspect of our personality and how our image is formed among
people.
(a) Body language (b) Written communication
(c) Visual communication (d) None of these
9. Which of the following is not a characteristic of feedback?

(a) Intention (b) Specific (c) Length (d) Clarity
10. Good job! Congratulations! is a type of ___________ feedback.

(a) formal (b) informal (c) specific (d) descriptive
11. Which of the following is not a 7C s of effective communication?

(a) Complexity (b) Clarity (c) Completeness (d) Courtesy
12. A/An __________ phrase will contain a noun or pronoun along with a participle. It is generally
separated by commas.
(a) infinitive (b) absolute (c) gerund (d) noun
13. An ___________ is a piece of writing intended for publishing in a newspaper or magazine.

(a) introduction (b) essay (c) article (d) None of these
14. Have you received the latest news about the match? Identify the parts of speech of the underlined
word.
(a) Adverb (b) Conjunction (c) Interjection (d) Adjective
15. Which of these sentences is in active voice?

(a) A movie is being watched by them.
(b) The car was repaired by Raju.
(c) He is reading a book.
(d) The thief was being chased by a policeman.
Answers:
1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (a) 5. (c)
6. (a) 7. (d) 8. (a) 9. (c) 10. (b)
11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (d) 15. (c)
1. What are various elements of a communication cycle?

Answer The various elements of a communication cycle are
 Sender: the person beginning the communication.
 Message: the information that the sender wants to convey.
 Channel: the means by which the information is sent.
 Receiver: the person to whom the message is sent.
 Feedback: the receiver s acknowledgement and response to the message.
2. What is 7 C s effective communication?

Answer There are 7 C s effective communication which are applicable for both written as well
as oral communication. These are as follows
 Clear Always say clearly, what you want to say.
 Concise Always use simple language and say only what is required.
 Concrete Always use proper words and phrases in the sentences.
 Correct Always use correct spelling and grammar in the sentences.
 Coherent Your word should be related to the main topic and your word should make
sense.
 Complete Your message should be complete and have all the needed information.
 Courteous Be honest, respectful and friendly with others.
3. List the various methods of communication.

Answer The various methods of communication are
 Face-to-face informal communication There is nothing better than face-to-face
communication. It helps the message to be understood clearly and quickly.
 e-mail e-mail can be used to communicate quickly with one or many individuals in
various locations. It offers flexibility, convenience and low-cost.
 Notice/Posters It is effective when the same message has to go out to a large group of
people. Generally used for where email communication may not be effective.
 Business Meetings Communication during business meetings at an organisation are
generally addressed to a group of people. It can be related to business, management and
organisational decisions.
4. What are the learning objectives of communication?

Answer Learning objectives of Effective communication are :
 Sending, receiving and understanding the message or information
 Development of Interposal Skills
 To express effectively with maximum efficiency
5. Explain the various elements of a communication process.

Answer The various elements of a communication cycle are
 Sender: the person beginning the communication.
 Message: the information that the sender wants to convey.
 Channel: the means by which the information is sent.
 Receiver: the person to whom the message is sent.
 Feedback: the receiver s acknowledgement and response to the message.
6. What is verbal communication and its type?

Answer Sounds, words, language, and speech are all examples of verbal communication.
Speaking is one of the most effective and often used in verbal communication methods.
Interpersonal Communication This type of communication is a one on one
communication that takes place between two people. It can be formal or informal.
Written Communication This method of communication entails the use of written words.
Letters, circulars, reports, manuals, SMS, social media chats, and so on are all examples. It could
be a group of two or more persons.
Small Group Communication When there are more than two people participating, this form of
communication occurs. Each participant has the opportunity to interact and speak with the others.
Public Communication The communication takes place when one individual addresses a large
group of audience.
7. Explain the importance of feedback.

Answer Importance of feedback are
 Validates Effective Listening: Shows you re paying attention and understanding.
 Motivates People: Makes people feel good and encourages them.
 Boosts Learning: Helps us learn and improve.
 Improves Performance and Decision Making: Points out what s done well and where to
improve.
8. What are the advantages and disadvantages of verbal communication?

Answer Advantage of verbal communication are
Advantages of Verbal communication
Time Saving We can express our thoughts easily and quickly and it is an easier form of
communication.
Quick Feedback We can get a quick response from the listener.
Disadvantages of verbal communication
Cultural Difference The cultural difference is the main disadvantage of verbal communication
Language barriers Difficult to share thoughts or ideas in different languages.
9. Explain the different types of non-verbal communication.

Answer Different types of non-verbal communication are
Facial Expression Our expressions can show different feelings, such as Happiness, Sadness,
Anger, Surprise, Fear, etc.
Posture Postures show our confidence and feelings. For example, a straight body posture shows
confidence while a slumped posture is a sign of weakness.
Gestures or Body Language Gestures include body movements that express an idea or
meaning. For example, raising a hand in class to ask a question and biting nails when nervous.
Touch We communicate a great deal through touch. For example, a firm handshake to display
confidence and pat on the back to encourage someone.
Space Space is the physical distance between two people. The space between tow persons while
communicating, generally depends on the intimacy or closeness between them.
Eye Contact The way we look at someone can communicate a lot. Eye contact shows that we
are paying attention to the person as opposed to looking away, which can make the other person
feel ignored.
Paralanguage How we speak affects our communication and includes the tone, speed and
volume of our voice. For example, talking fast may show happiness, excitement or nervousness
while speaking slow may show seriousness or sadness.
10. How many types of Feedback in communication skills? What are the good feedback in
communication skills?
Answer There are basically three types of feedback.
 Positive Feedback
 Negative Feedback
 No Feedback
A good feedback is one that is
Specific: General comment should be avoided. To clarify your statement, try to provide
examples. Rather than giving advice let the receiver decide what to do with your feedback.
Timely: Always respond on time, because if input is delayed for too long, it loses its impact.
Polite: While sharing feedback is necessary, the recipient should not be insulted by the input s
language.
Offering continuing support: Feedback should be shared on a regular basis. Let recipients know
you re available for help once you ve given them feedback.

11. What are the basic parts of speech in the English Language?
Answer There are eight basic parts of speech in the English language. These are none, pronoun,
verb, adjective, adverb, preposition, conjunction and interjection.
Noun Nouns is the name of a person, place, animal or thing. This is also called naming words.
Pronoun A pronoun is used in place of a noun.
Adjectives Adjectives are words that describe other words.
Verbs Verbs are words that show action.
Adverbs Adverbs are words that add meaning to verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs.
Preposition A preposition is a word palace before a noun or pronoun.
Conjunction A conjunction is a word that connects two words, phrases, or clauses.
Interjection A word used to communicate emotion is called an interjection.
12. Explain the Barriers of the Effective Communication.

Answer: Barriers of the Effective Communication are
Physical Barriers The environmental and natural conditions that operate as a barrier in
communication when conveying messages from sender to receiver are referred to as physical
barriers.
Linguistic Barriers A language barrier to communication is the inability to communicate using
a language. The most common communication barriers are language barriers, which lead to
misunderstandings and misinterpretations between people.
Interpersonal Barriers When a sender s message is received differently than intended, it
creates barriers to interpersonal contact. It s also tough to communicate with someone who
refuses to converse or express their emotions or opinions.
Organizational Barriers Formal hierarchical structures are used to create organizations that
adhere to performance standards, rules & regulations, processes, policies, and behavioral norms,
among other things.
Cultural Barriers When people from different cultures are unable to understand each other s
languages, it causes problems and inconveniences.

DIGITAL DOCUMENTATION (ADVANCED)
REVISION NOTES
CREATE AND APPLY STYLE IN THE DOCUMENT
Style refers to a pre-defined set of formatting attributes that can be applied to text, paragraphs, pages,
and other elements of a document. Styles help to ensure consistency in formatting throughout the
document and make it easier to manage and modify the document s formatting.
Advantages of Style
 Provides consistency throughout the document
 Saves time and increases efficiency
 Allows for easy updates and modifications
 Makes document management simpler and more organized
 Enhances accessibility for readers who use assistive technologies.
There are several types of styles in OpenOffice, including:

 Character styles: These are used to apply formatting to specific characters or words
within a paragraph. For example, you might use a character style to make a particular
word bold or italicized.
 Paragraph styles: These are used to apply formatting to entire paragraphs, including
text alignment, spacing, and indentation.
 Page styles: These are used to define the layout and formatting of individual pages,
including margins, headers, and footers.
 List styles: These are used to define the formatting of bulleted or numbered lists.
 Frame styles: These are used to define the formatting of frames, which are used to
hold graphics or other elements within a document.
 Table styles: These are used to define the formatting of tables, including cell borders,
backgrounds, and text alignment.
 Graphics styles: These are used to define the formatting of graphics or images within
a document, including borders, backgrounds, and text wrapping.
How to Apply Style in OpenOffice.org

Step 1 : Select the text, paragraph, or other element where you want to apply the style.
Step 2 : Click Format > Style and Formatting or press F11
Step 3 : Select any one of the style (e.g., Paragraph, Character, etc.)
What is Fill Format Mode and How to apply

Fill Format Mode is a feature in OpenOffice that allows you to copy the formatting from one element
of a document and apply it to another element. This can be useful when you want to quickly apply
consistent formatting to multiple elements within a document.
How to Apply Fill Format Mode
Step 1 : Select the element that contains the formatting you want to copy.
Step 2 : Click on the Fill Format mode icon in the Style and Formatting window.
Step 3 : Select the element or elements that you want to apply the formatting to.
Step 4 : Click on the element that you want to apply the formatting.
Creating New Custom Style in OpenOffice.org

There are two diffierent ways to create a Style
1) Creating a new Style from a selection
2) Dragging and Dropping to Create A Style
Create New Style from Selection

By replicating an existing manual format, you can make a new style. This new style will only be
applied to this document and will not be saved in the template.
Step 1 : Select the formatted text or paragraph.

Step 2 : From the top menu, select Styles > New Style (or press F11).
Step 3 : In the New Style window, enter a name for the new style and select the type of style you
want to create.
Step 4 : Make any additional changes to the style options.
Step 5 : Click OK to save the new style.
Drag and Drop to create New Style
You can drag and drop a text selection into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new style.
Step 1 : Open the Styles and Formatting window.
Step 2 : Select text and drag it to the Styles and Formatting window.
Step 3 : In the Create Style dialog box, type a name for the new style. The list shows the names of
existing custom styles of the selected type, if any. Click OK to save the new style.
Step 4 : If the Paragraph Styles list is showing in the Styles and Formatting window, a new paragraph

style will be added to the list. If Character Styles are active, the character style will be added to the
list.
Modifying Custom or Pre defined Styles

There are two different ways to modify Style in OpenOffice
 Updating a style from a selection
 Load or copy styles from another document or template
Updating a Style from a selection

To update a style from a selection:
Step 1 : Open the Styles and Formatting window.
Step 2 : In the document, select an item that has the format.
Step 3 : In the Styles and Formatting window, select the style you want to update (singleclick, not
double-click), then long-click on the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and click on
Update Style.
Load or copy styles from another document or template

You can copy styles by loading them from a template or another document:
Step 1 : Open the document into which you wish to paste styles.
Step 2 : Long-click on the arrow next to the New Style from Selection symbol in the Styles and
Formatting window, and then select Load Styles.

Step 3 : Locate and choose the template you wish to copy styles from on the Load Styles box.
Step 4 : Decide which style categories should be duplicated.
Step 5 : Click OK to copy the styles.
How to Insert and use Image in Digital Document

There are various ways to insert images into a document, including via the Drag and Drop, Insert
Image from File, Insert Image from Clipboard, Open Office Gallery, and a scanner.
1. Drag and Drop
2. Insert Image from Dialog Box
3. Insert Image from Clipboard
4. Insert Image from Gallery

5. Insert Image from Scanner
Drag and Drop

To drag an image file into a digital document, follow these steps:
Step 1 : Open a File browser window and locate the image you want to insert.
Step 2 : Drag the image into the Writer document and drop it where you want.
Insert Image from Dialog Box

To insert an image file into a digital document, follow these steps
Step 1: Click in the Open Office document in the first step to place the image there.
Step 2: From the menu bar, select Insert > Picture > From File.
Step 3: Navigate to the file that needs to be inserted on the Insert Picture dialogue, select it, and click
Open.
Insert Image from Clipboard

Step 1 : Open the document in which you want to insert the image.
Step 2 : Place the cursor where you want the image to be inserted.
Step 3 : Press Ctrl+V or right-click and select Paste to insert the image from the clipboard.
Step 4 : Resize or move the image as necessary.
Insert Image from Gallery

Step 1 : Open the document in which you want to insert the image.
Step 2 : From the top menu, select View > Gallery (or press F6).
Step 3 : In the Gallery window that appears, browse through the categories to find the image you
want to insert.
Step 4 : Click on the image to select it.
Step 5 : Click and drag the selected image into the document where you want it to appear.
Insert Image from Scanner

If your computer has a scanner attached, Open Office may access the scanning software and enter the
scanned item as an image into the Open Office document. To insert image
Click the area where the image to be placed, then choose Insert > Picture > Scan > Select Source to
begin the process.
Modifying Image in OpenOffice.org

You might need to edit a new image you include so that it matches the document. Here, we ll go
through how to use the Picture toolbar, as well as how to resize, crop, and rotate a photo using a
workaround.
Picture Toolbar
The Picture toolbar displays when you insert a picture or choose one that is already in the page. View
> Toolbars > Picture allows you to set it to always be visible.
Graphics mode
You can change color images to grayscale by selecting the image and then selecting Grayscale from
the Graphics mode list.
Flip vertically or horizontally
Select the image, then click the corresponding icon to turn it vertically or horizontally.
Filters
The filters are briefly described in the following table, but the best way to comprehend them is to use
them. Try around with the various filters and their settings.

Transparency
To make a picture more transparent, change the percentage value in the Transparency box on the
Picture toolbar. When making a watermark or enclosing the image in the background.
Using The Formatting Toolbar And Picture Dialog

a. Cropping Images
You could want to crop (cut off) a portion of the image if you re only interested in it for your
document. Right-click the image and choose Picture from the pop-up menu to begin cropping it.
b. Keep scale / Keep image size

When the Keep scale option is used (the default), cropping an image does not alter its scale.
When the option to Keep Picture Size is used, cropping results in either an increase in image size (for
positive cropping values), a decrease in image size (for negative cropping values), or an image
distortion.
c. Width and Height

As you input values in the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom fields under Scale or Image size, the Width
and Height fields change. To find the precise amount to crop by, use the thumbnail next to these
fields.
d. Resizing an Image
If the inserted image is too big or too small, it might not fit into the paper completely. You can resize
the image in Writer.

e. Rotating a Picture
With the aid of the rotation option in digital documentation, you can rotate the image.
f. Creating Drawing Objects

Display the Drawing toolbar by selecting View > Toolbars > Drawing to start utilising the drawing
tools.
CREATE AND USE TEMPLATE

A template is a sample that you can follow while writing new documents. Documents that have
previously been designed are called templates. Simply substitute your own text for the sample text.
Creating a Template
You can create your own templates in two ways:
 from a document,
 and using a wizard.
Creating A Template From A Document

Step 1 : Open a new or existing document of the type you want to make into a template (text
document, spreadsheet, drawing, presentation).
Step 2 : Add the content and styles that you want.
Step 3 : From the main menu, choose
File > Templates > Save.

Creating A Template Using A Wizard
Step 1 : Choose File > Wizards >[type of template required]
Step 2 : Follow the instructions on the pages of the wizard like the date, subject line , salutation, and
complimentary close
Step 3 : In the last section of the wizard, you can specify the name and location for saving the
template.
Step 4 : Finally, you have the option of creating a new document from your template immediately, or
manually changing the template.
CREATE AND CUSTOMIZE TABLE OF CONTENTS

A table of contents (TOC) is a list of the main sections or chapters in a document, a table of contents
gives readers a quick summary of the document s content and a mechanism to quickly search for a
specific piece of information within it. The table of contents typically includes section or chapter
titles and the corresponding page numbers.
Advantages of Table of Content

 Provides quick navigation
 Efficient organization
 Improved comprehension
 Professional appearance
 Accessibility for readers with disabilities
What is the purpose of Table of Content

1. It provides users with a summary of the contents and structure of the document.
2. It enables users to jump right to a certain area of a document.
How to Insert Table of Content in Digital Documentation
To insert table of Content in Digital Document follow the following link
Insert > Indexes and Tables > Indexes and Tables.

Basic Setting in Table of Content
Adding A Title
Put a title in the Title area if you want one for the table of contents. (If Writer automatically entered a
title in this field, you may edit it by typing over the value.) Clear the Title field to remove the title.
Protecting Against Manual Changes

Select the Protected against manual changes checkbox to prevent accidental changes to the table of
contents.
 If this box is checked, the context menu or the Insert Table/Index window are the only
ways to modify the table of contents.
 If this box is unchecked, The table of contents can be modified immediately on the
document page, just like regular text..
Changing The Number Of Levels

When creating the table of contents, Writer by default considers 10 levels of headings. Enter the
required number in the Evaluate up to level spin box to adjust the number of levels examined.
Assigning Custom Styles
All paragraphs created using the default heading styles are automatically assigned to the table of
contents by Writer (Heading 1, Heading 2, and so on).
Using The Entries Tab

Entries table help to customize the formatting of the TOC entries. This tab allows you to specify how
the headings and subheadings in the document should appear in the TOC, including the font, style,
indentation, and page number formatting.

 E# The chapter number is indicated by the E# button.
 E The entered text is represented by the E button.
 T A tab stop is represented by the T button.
 # The page number is indicated by the # button.
 LS The beginning of a hyperlink is indicated by the LS button. (This button is absent
from the Structure line by default.)
 LE A hyperlink s conclusion is indicated by the LE button. (This button is absent
from the Structure line by default.)
Deleting Elements
Click the button next to the element you want to remove from the Structure line, and then press the
Delete key on your computer. For instance, click the T button and then press the Delete key to
remove a tab stop.
Using The Background Tab

To add colour or a graphic to the table backdrop, use the Background tab.
Saving The Table Of Contents

Click OK to save the table of contents and have it display in your document. The table of contents is
displayed in your document once the Insert Index/Table window closes.
IMPLEMENT MAIL MERGE
Using a mail merge, you can personalise a letter you ve already written and send it to a large group of
recipients, giving the impression that you wrote it specifically for them. A mail merge can also be a
rapid technique to create labels or envelopes with the addresses for various persons on each label or
envelope using a list of people s mailing addresses.
Anyone or any business that interacts frequently with customers, partners, parents, or other
individuals must use the mail merge.
How to create Mail Merge in Digital Documentation

Step 1: Select starting document
Step 2: Select document type
Step 3: Insert address block or Selecting the data source
Step 4: Create salutation
Step 5: Adjust layout
Step 6: Edit document and insert extra fields
Step 7: Personalize documents
Step 8: Save, print or send
What is Data Source

During the mail merge process, data from another document referred to as the data source, Data
Source connects to the main document and retrieves the information like names, addresses, and phone
numbers can be found in a document, spreadsheet, or database that serves as the data source.
What are the different type of Data Source available in Mail Merge
OpenOffice.org allows data sources to be accessed and then linked into OOo documents. For
example, a mail merge links an external document containing a list of names and addresses into a
letter, with one copy of the letter being generated for each entry.
Different type of File which support to insert data in Mail merge are
1. Spreadsheet
2. Text File
3. Access or Base Database
4. Address Book

DIGITAL DOCUMENTATION (ADVANCED)
1. What is the shortcut key to align selected text to the right in Microsoft Word?
a. Ctrl + L
b. Ctrl + E
c. Ctrl + R
d. Ctrl + J
Ans: c. Ctrl + R
2. Which of the following is NOT a type of font style in digital documents?

a. Bold
b. Italic
c. Regular
d. Outline
Ans: d. Outline
3. What is the shortcut key to increase the indent of selected text in OpenOffice Writer?
a. Ctrl + [
b. Ctrl + ]
c. Ctrl + {
d. Ctrl + }
Ans: b. Ctrl + ]
4. Which of the following is a type of tab stop in digital documents?

a. Left-aligned
b. Center-aligned
c. Right-aligned
d. All of the above
5. What is the shortcut key to copy selected text in a digital document?

a. Ctrl + X
b. Ctrl + C
c. Ctrl + V
d. Ctrl + Z
Ans: b. Ctrl + C
6. What is Mail Merge in Digital Documents?

a. A way to send an email with an attachment
b. A process to combine a document with a database to create personalized copies
c. A feature to create a table of contents
d. A tool to add hyperlinks to a document
Ans: b. A process to combine a document with a database to create personalized copies
7. Which of the following is NOT a step in Mail Merge?

a. Create a database
b. Create a form letter
c. Create a table of contents
d. Connect to the database
Ans: c. Create a table of contents

8. Which of the following is a type of database used in Mail Merge?
a. Microsoft Excel
b. Microsoft PowerPoint
c. Microsoft Word
d. Microsoft Access
Ans: a. Microsoft Excel
9. What is the purpose of a form letter in Mail Merge?

a. To connect to the database
b. To create a table of contents
c. To create a personalized letter
d. To create a hyperlink
Ans: c. To create a personalized letter
10. Which of the following is NOT a type of Mail Merge document?

a. Envelopes
b. Labels
c. Emails
d. Tables
Ans: d. Tables
11. Which of the following is a Mail Merge field?

a. <<Address>>
b. Address
c. {Address}
d. [Address]
Ans: a. <<Address>>
12. What is the purpose of a data source in Mail Merge?

a. To create a form letter
b. To connect to the database
c. To create a table of contents
d. To add a hyperlink
Ans: b. To connect to the database
13. What is the shortcut key to preview the Mail Merge document in Microsoft Word?
a. Alt + P
b. Alt + F
c. Alt + V
d. Alt + M
Ans: a. Alt + P
14. Which of the following is NOT a step to complete a Mail Merge in Microsoft Word?
a. Edit the merged document
b. Preview the merged document
c. Save the merged document
d. Print the merged document
Ans: c. Save the merged document
15. Which of the following is a Mail Merge option in Microsoft Word?

a. Merge and Split
b. Merge and Protect
c. Merge and Format
d. Merge and Center
Ans: d. Merge and Center
16. Which of the following types of data can be used in a Mail Merge?
a. Text only
b. Numbers only
c. Text and numbers
d. Images only
Ans: c. Text and numbers
17. Which of the following is NOT a type of Mail Merge in Microsoft Word?
a. Directory
b. Email
c. Form
d. Presentation
Ans: d. Presentation
18. Which of the following is an example of a salutation field in Mail Merge?

a. <<First Name>>
b. <<Last Name>>
c. <<Title>>
d. <<Email Address>>
Ans: c. <<Title>>
19. What is the purpose of a Mail Merge wizard in Microsoft Word?

a. To format the merged document
b. To create the data source
c. To guide you through the steps of Mail Merge
d. To preview the merged document
Ans: c. To guide you through the steps of Mail Merge
20. Which of the following is a benefit of using Mail Merge in Digital Documents?
a. Saves time and effort
b. Increases document size
c. Requires advanced technical knowledge
d. Decreases document quality
Ans: a. Saves time and effort
21. Which of the following is a Mail Merge option in Microsoft Word that allows you to send emails
directly from Word?
a. Merge and Split
b. Merge and Protect
c. Merge and Format
d. Merge and Email
Ans: d. Merge and Email
22. Which of the following is a way to customize a Mail Merge document?

a. Change the font size of the data source
b. Change the color of the merge field
c. Change the page orientation of the merged document
d. Change the filename of the data source
Ans: b. Change the color of the merge field
23. Which of the following is a Mail Merge option in Microsoft Word that allows you to choose
which records to merge?
a. Filter
b. Find
c. Replace
d. Sort
Ans: a. Filter
24. Which of the following is a way to edit a Mail Merge document after it has been merged?
a. Edit the original data source
b. Edit the merged document directly
c. Edit the Mail Merge fields
d. Edit the font of the merged document
Ans: b. Edit the merged document directly
25. Which of the following is a way to insert a Mail Merge field in Microsoft Word?
a. Insert > Field
b. Insert > Picture
c. Insert > Hyperlink
d. Insert > Table
Ans: a. Insert > Field
26. What is a Table of Contents?

a. A summary of a book
b. An index of a book
c. A list of the chapters or sections of a book or document
d. A glossary of terms
Ans: c. A list of the chapters or sections of a book or document
27. Which of the following is an advantage of using a Table of Contents in a document?

a. It makes the document more visually appealing
b. It provides an easy way to navigate the document
c. It helps to shorten the length of the document
d. It provides a summary of the document
Ans: b. It provides an easy way to navigate the document
28. In which tab of the ribbon in OpenOffice Writer can you find the option to insert a Table of
Contents?
a. Home
b. Insert
c. Page Layout
d. References
Ans: d. References
29. How is a Table of Contents created in OpenOffice Writer?

a. Manually typing the headings and page numbers
b. Automatically generating it using the headings in the document
c. Copy-pasting the headings and page numbers from another document
Ans: b. Automatically generating it using the headings in the document
30. What is the purpose of updating a Table of Contents in a document?

a. To correct any errors in the page numbers
b. To add or remove headings from the document
c. To change the formatting of the Table of Contents
d. All of the above
31. What happens when you select a Table of Contents in OpenOffice Writer and press F9?
a. The Table of Contents is deleted
b. The Table of Contents is updated
c. The Table of Contents is highlighted
Ans: b. The Table of Contents is updated
32. Which of the following formats can a Table of Contents be saved in?
a. PDF
b. DOCX
c. ODT
d. All of the above
33. What is the purpose of the Level setting in a Table of Contents?

a. To change the font size of the headings
b. To specify the heading levels that should be included in the Table of Contents
c. To change the color of the headings
Ans: b. To specify the heading levels that should be included in the Table of Contents
34. How can you customize the formatting of a Table of Contents in OpenOffice Writer?
a. By using the Table of Contents dialog box
b. By using the Page Layout tab of the ribbon
c. By manually formatting each entry in the Table of Contents
Ans: a. By using the Table of Contents dialog box
35. What is the purpose of the Protect Against Manual Changes option in the Table of Contents
dialog box?
a. To prevent the Table of Contents from being edited manually
b. To prevent the headings in the document from being edited
c. To prevent the page numbers from being edited
Ans: a. To prevent the Table of Contents from being edited manually
36. How can you remove a Table of Contents from a document in OpenOffice Writer?
a. By selecting the Table of Contents and pressing the Delete key
b. By selecting the Table of Contents and choosing the Delete option from the context menu
c. By deselecting the Table of Contents option in the Table of Contents dialog box
Ans: a. By selecting the Table of Contents and pressing the Delete key
37. Which option in the table of contents menu in OpenOffice Writer allows you to customize the
appearance of the table of contents?
a. Structure
b. Entries
c. Styles
d. Preview
Ans: c. Styles
38. In Microsoft Word, what is the keyboard shortcut to update the table of contents?
a. Ctrl + U
b. Ctrl + Shift + U
c. Ctrl + Shift + F9
d. Ctrl + Alt + F9
Ans: d. Ctrl + Alt + F9
39. In OpenOffice Writer, what is the purpose of the Outline Level option under the Entries tab in
the table of contents menu?
a. To specify which headings should be included in the table of contents
b. To define the formatting of the entries in the table of contents
c. To group similar entries together in the table of contents
d. To set the indentation level of each entry in the table of contents
Ans: a. To specify which headings should be included in the table of contents
40. Which of the following is a benefit of using a table of contents in a digital document?
a. It makes the document look more visually appealing
b. It helps the reader navigate the document more easily
c. It saves paper when printing the document
d. It increases the word count of the document
Ans: b. It helps the reader navigate the document more easily
41. What is the purpose of the From template option in the table of contents menu in OpenOffice
Writer?
a. To apply a pre-existing style to the table of contents
b. To create a new style for the table of contents
c. To import a table of contents from another document
d. To customize the structure of the table of contents
Ans: a. To apply a pre-existing style to the table of contents
42. Which of the following is not a recommended practice when creating a table of contents in a
digital document?
a. Using automatic numbering for headings
b. Including every heading in the document in the table of contents
c. Updating the table of contents before printing or sharing the document
d. Using a consistent style for all headings in the document
Ans: b. Including every heading in the document in the table of contents
43. In Microsoft Word, which option in the table of contents menu allows you to change the font and
size of the table of contents entries?
a. Show Levels
b. Formats
c. Styles
d. Options
Ans: b. Formats
44. In OpenOffice Writer, which option in the table of contents menu allows you to add or remove
hyperlinks from the table of contents entries?
a. Entries
b. Structure
c. Styles
d. Preview
Ans: a. Entries

45. What is the purpose of the Update page numbers only option in the table of contents menu in
Microsoft Word?
a. To update the page numbers in the table of contents without changing the formatting
b. To update the formatting of the table of contents without changing the page numbers
c. To add or remove entries from the table of contents without affecting the page numbers
d. To create a new table of contents with updated page numbers and formatting
Ans: a. To update the page numbers in the table of contents without changing the formatting
46. Which of the following is true about a Table of Contents in a digital document?
a. It is used to list all the tables in the document.
b. It is used to list all the figures in the document.
c. It is used to list all the headings and subheadings in the document.
d. It is used to list all the footnotes in the document.
Ans: c. It is used to list all the headings and subheadings in the document.
47. What is the purpose of a Table of Contents in a digital document?

a. To provide a list of all the tables in the document.
b. To provide a list of all the figures in the document.
c. To provide a list of all the headings and subheadings in the document.
d. To provide a list of all the footnotes in the document.
Ans: c. To provide a list of all the headings and subheadings in the document.
48. Which of the following is a benefit of using a Table of Contents in a digital document?
a. It makes the document more visually appealing.
b. It allows the reader to quickly locate specific sections of the document.
c. It increases the length of the document.
d. It improves the grammar and spelling in the document.
Ans: b. It allows the reader to quickly locate specific sections of the document.
49. How is a Table of Contents created in a digital document?

a. It is automatically generated based on the headings and subheadings in the document.
b. It is manually created by the author of the document.
c. It is automatically generated based on the figures in the document.
d. It is automatically generated based on the footnotes in the document.
Ans: a. It is automatically generated based on the headings and subheadings in the document.
50. Which of the following is a common feature of a Table of Contents in a digital document?
a. Each section is numbered and corresponds to a page number.
b. Each section is highlighted with a different color.
c. Each section contains a footnote.
d. Each section is accompanied by a photograph.
Ans: a. Each section is numbered and corresponds to a page number.
51. What is the purpose of adding hyperlinks to a Table of Contents in a digital document?
a. To make the document more visually appealing.
b. To allow the reader to navigate directly to a specific section of the document.
c. To increase the length of the document.
d. To improve the grammar and spelling in the document.
Ans: b. To allow the reader to navigate directly to a specific section of the document.
52. Which of the following is a disadvantage of using a Table of Contents in a digital document?
a. It can make the document more difficult to navigate.
b. It can make the document more visually unappealing.
c. It can decrease the length of the document.
d. It can decrease the readability of the document.
Ans: a. It can make the document more difficult to navigate.
53. What is the difference between a Table of Contents and an Index in a digital document?
a. A Table of Contents is used to list all the tables in the document, while an Index is used to list all
the headings and subheadings in the document.
b. A Table of Contents is used to list all the figures in the document, while an Index is used to list all
the footnotes in the document.
c. A Table of Contents is used to list all the headings and subheadings in the document, while an
Index is used to list all the tables and figures in the document.
d. A Table of Contents and an Index are the same thing.
Ans: c. A Table of Contents is used
54. What is a template in digital document?

a. A pre-designed document with placeholders for text, graphics, and other elements
b. A type of font used in digital documents
c. A tool to organize a digital document
d. A way to convert digital documents into other file formats
Ans: a. A pre-designed document with placeholders for text, graphics, and other elements
55. Which of the following is NOT an advantage of using templates in digital documents?
a. Saves time and effort in document creation
b. Ensures consistency and branding across documents
c. Helps to organize and structure information effectively
d. Limits creativity and flexibility in document design
Ans: d. Limits creativity and flexibility in document design
56. Which of the following software programs offers a variety of templates for digital documents?
a. Adobe Photoshop
b. Microsoft Excel
c. Google Docs
d. All of the above
Ans: c. Google Docs
57. Which of the following is NOT a type of template available for digital documents?
a. Business card template
b. Resume template
c. Newsletter template
d. Spreadsheet template
Ans: d. Spreadsheet template
58. Which of the following is NOT a step in using a template for a digital document?
a. Customizing the template with personal information and details
b. Saving the customized template as a new document
c. Printing the template for distribution
d. Uploading the customized template to a cloud storage service
Ans: c. Printing the template for distribution
59. Which of the following is an example of a digital document template?

a. A blank sheet of paper
b. A resume with pre-defined sections for work experience and education
c. A list of bullet points
d. A spreadsheet with formulas for calculations
Ans: b. A resume with pre-defined sections for work experience and education
60. Templates in digital documents are typically created by:
a. Professional designers
b. Software developers
c. End-users
Ans: a. Professional designers
65. Which of the following is an advantage of creating custom templates for digital documents?
a. Ensures consistency and branding across documents
b. Saves time and effort in document creation
c. Increases creativity and flexibility in document design
d. All of the above
66. Which of the following is a benefit of using templates in digital documents for businesses?
a. Reduces the need for professional graphic designers
b. Helps to maintain a consistent brand image
c. Increases creativity and flexibility in document design
Ans: b. Helps to maintain a consistent brand image
67. Which of the following is NOT a type of template available in Microsoft Word?
a. Newsletter template
b. Invoice template
c. Resume template
d. Database template
Ans: d. Database template
68. Which of the following is NOT an advantage of using templates for digital documents in
education?
a. Saves time and effort in creating lesson plans and assignments
b. Helps to maintain consistency in grading criteria and rubrics
c. Facilitates collaboration and sharing of materials among educators
d. Limits creativity and flexibility in lesson planning and design
Ans: d. Limits creativity and flexibility in lesson planning and design
69. Which of the following is NOT a type of template available in Google Docs?
a. Business card template
b. Invoice template
c. Presentation template
d. Timeline template
Ans: a. Business card template
70. What is a template in digital documents?

a. A pre-designed document format that can be used as a starting point
b. A software program used for creating digital documents
c. A type of font used in digital documents
d. A tool for creating tables in digital documents
Ans: a. A pre-designed document format that can be used as a starting point
71. Which of the following file formats can be used to save a template in OpenOffice Writer?
a. .odt
b. .doc
c. .pdf
d. .txt
Ans: a. .odt
72. Which of the following is an advantage of using templates in digital documents?

a. Saves time and effort in creating documents from scratch
b. Increases the file size of the document
c. Makes the document harder to read
d. Requires more technical knowledge to use
Ans: a. Saves time and effort in creating documents from scratch
73. Can templates be edited and customized according to user requirements?

a. Yes, templates can be edited and customized
b. No, templates are fixed and cannot be changed
c. It depends on the file format of the template
d. It depends on the software used to create the template
Ans: a. Yes, templates can be edited and customized
74. Which of the following is a common use of templates in digital documents?

a. Creating resumes and cover letters
b. Writing blogs and articles
c. Creating presentations
d. Editing and manipulating images
Ans: a. Creating resumes and cover letters
75. Which of the following is not a type of template in digital documents?

a. Style template
b. Format template
c. Layout template
d. Sound template
Ans: d. Sound template
76. Can templates be shared and used by multiple users?

a. Yes, templates can be shared and used by multiple users
b. No, templates are restricted to a single user
c. It depends on the software used to create the template
d. It depends on the file format of the template
Ans: a. Yes, templates can be shared and used by multiple users
77. Which of the following is a disadvantage of using templates in digital documents?

a. Limitations in customization options
b. Increased file size of the document
c. Requires more technical knowledge to use
d. Decreases the overall quality of the document
Ans: a. Limitations in customization options
78. Which of the following software programs does not support the use of templates in digital
documents?
a. OpenOffice Writer
b. Microsoft Word
c. Google Docs
d. Adobe Photoshop
Ans: d. Adobe Photoshop

79. Which of the following is not a benefit of using templates in digital documents?
a. Consistency in document formatting
b. Saves time and effort in creating documents
c. Increases the overall file size of the document
d. Enhances the professional look of the document
Ans: c. Increases the overall file size of the document
80. Which menu option is used to insert an image in a digital document?

a. Insert
b. Format
c. File
d. Tools
Ans: a. Insert
81. Which of the following image formats is NOT supported in digital documents?
a. JPG
b. PNG
c. PDF
d. BMP
Ans: c. PDF
83. Which of the following is NOT a way to insert an image in a digital document?
a. Drag and drop
b. Copy and paste
c. Insert from file
d. Type the image URL
Ans: d. Type the image URL
84. Which of the following is a way to adjust the size of an image in a digital document?
a. Dragging the corners of the image
b. Changing the image format
c. Inserting a new image
d. Deleting the image and re-inserting it
Ans: a. Dragging the corners of the image
85. What is the purpose of the Wrap option when inserting an image in a digital document?
a. To adjust the size of the image
b. To add a border around the image
c. To align the image with the text
d. To apply a filter to the image
Ans: c. To align the image with the text
86. Which of the following is an advantage of inserting images in a digital document?

a. Images take up less storage space than text
b. Images can convey information more effectively than text alone
c. Images cannot be copied or manipulated
d. Images do not require any special formatting or editing
Ans: b. Images can convey information more effectively than text alone
87. What is the purpose of the Alt Text option when inserting an image in a digital document?
a. To provide a description of the image for visually impaired readers
b. To adjust the size of the image
c. To align the image with the text
d. To apply a filter to the image
Ans: a. To provide a description of the image for visually impaired readers
88. Which of the following is NOT a way to adjust the position of an image in a digital document?
a. Drag and drop
b. Cut and paste
c. Use the arrow keys on the keyboard
d. Use the mouse scroll wheel
Ans: b. Cut and paste
89. Which of the following is a way to crop an image in a digital document?

a. Use the Crop tool in the image editor
b. Delete the part of the image that is not needed
c. Adjust the image size
Ans: a. Use the Crop tool in the image editor
90. Which of the following is NOT a reason to use images in a digital document?
a. To break up large blocks of text
b. To illustrate a point or idea
c. To make the document more visually appealing
d. To save storage space
Ans: d. To save storage space
91. Which of the following file formats is commonly used for inserting images in digital documents?
a. .docx
b. .pdf
c. .jpg
d. .txt
Ans: c. .jpg
92. Which toolbar is used for inserting images in Microsoft Word?

a. Drawing
b. Formatting
c. Insert
d. View
Ans: c. Insert
94. Which of the following options is used to resize an image in Microsoft Word?
a. Resize handle
b. Right-click and select Resize
c. Image toolbar
d. All of the above
95. Which of the following options is used to adjust the brightness and contrast of an image in
Microsoft Word?
a. Format Picture
b. Crop Picture
c. Recolor Picture
d. Compress Pictures
Ans: c. Recolor Picture
96. Which of the following options is used to wrap text around an image in Microsoft Word?
a. Text Wrapping
b. Format Picture
c. Wrap Text
Ans: a. Text Wrapping
97. Which of the following options is used to add alternative text to an image in Microsoft Word?
a. Alt Text
b. Image Description
c. Caption
d. Title
Ans: a. Alt Text
98. Which of the following options is used to rotate an image in Microsoft Word?
a. Crop Picture
b. Format Picture
c. Rotate
d. Both A and C
Ans:
d. Both A and C
99. Which of the following options is used to add a border to an image in Microsoft Word?
a. Picture Border
b. Text Box Border
c. Page Border
d. All of the above
Ans: a. Picture Border
100. Which of the following options is used to remove the background of an image in Microsoft
Word?
a. Crop Picture
b. Format Picture
c. Remove Background
d. All of the above
Ans: c. Remove Background
101. Which of the following options is used to insert an image in Google Docs?
a. Insert Image
b. Add Image
c. Insert Picture
d. Add Picture
Ans: a. Insert Image
1. ___________ is a set of formats that you can apply to selected pages, text, frames, and other
elements in your document.
a. Style
b. Format
c. Design
Ans: a. Style
2. You can apply a whole group of formats at the same time using ___________.
a. Style
b. Format
c. Design
Ans: a. Style
3. Give the example of style in OpenOffice.org __________.

a. Page Style
b. Paragraph Style
c. Character Style
d. All of the above
4. How you can apply style in the digital documentation _________.

a. Using the styles and formatting windows
b. Using fill format mode
c. Both a) and b)
5. ___________affect the font and size of chosen text within a paragraph, as well as bold and italic
forms.
a. Page styles
b. Paragraph styles
c. Character styles
d. Graphic styles
Ans: c. Character styles
6. Which style includes headers and footers, as well as borders and margins?
a. Character Style
b. Page Style
c. Frame style
d. Presentation Style
Ans: b. Page Style
7. Which style affects the font size, boldness, and italics format of the selected text?
a. Cell Styles
b. Numbering Styles
c. Character Styles
d. Frame Styles
Ans: c. Character Styles
8. How you can create a new style in digital documentation _____________.

a. Creating a new style from a selection
b. Dragging and dropping to create a style
c. Both a) and b)
9. How you can modify style in digital documentation ___________.

a. Updating a style from a selection
b. Load or copy styles from another document or template
c. Both a) and b)
20. Styles and Formatting Window is available in ______ menu.
a. Format
b. Insert
c. Tools
d. View
Ans: a. Format
21. Images can be added to a document in several ways by inserting _____________.

a. From Graphics Program
b. From Scanner
c. Form Open Office Gallery
d. All of the above
22. Krishna wants to create a flowchart in Word for his applications. Which option should he choose
in order to do this work quickly?
a. Drawing/Shapes
b. Symbols
c. Pictures
d. All of these
Ans: c. Pictures
23. Using the ____________ option in a word processor, the user can insert lines, simple geometric
forms, arrows, stars, banners, and callouts into the manuscript.
a. Pictures
b. Chart
c. Symbol
d. Shapes
Ans: d. Shapes
24. By selecting the ______ option, you can copy Styles from a template or another document.
a. New Style from selection.
b. Update Style.
c. Load Style.
d. None of the Above
Ans: c. Load Style.
25. How many resize handles will be there around the image?
a. Six
b. Eight
c. Ten
d. Five
Ans: b. Eight
26. Fatima has added a photograph to a document. She wishes to cut a portion of the image. Which
method should she use to complete the task?
a. Cut
b. Copy
c. Crop
d. Layout
Ans: c. Crop
27. To insert hyperlink in digital document you have to use the following shortcut key:
a. Ctrl+K
b. Ctrl+H
c. Ctrl+L
d. Ctrl+P
Ans: a. Ctrl+K
28. Area where cut and copied image stored is _________________

a. Clipboard
b. RAM
c. ROM
d. Imageboard
Ans: a. Clipboard
29. Which of the following is not a Graphic filter component in digital documents?
a. Invert
b. Smooth
c. Sharpen
d. Wrapping
Ans: d. Wrapping
30. You can change color images to grayscale by selecting the image and then selecting Grayscale
from the ____________.
a. Graphics mode
b. Filter
c. Flip
Ans: a. Graphics mode
31. __________ helps to transport the image vertically or horizontally.

a. Graphics mode
b. Filter
c. Flip
Ans: b. Filter
32. _________ options are used to convert the color values of a color image or the brightness values
of a grayscale image.
a. Smooth
b. Invert
c. Sharper
d. Remove noise
Ans: b. Invert
33. __________ helps to mimic the effects of too much light in a picture.
a. Smooth
b. Invert
c. Solarization
d. Remove noise
Ans: c. Solarization
34. ___________ makes a picture appear like a painting by reducing the number of colors used.
a. Smooth
b. Posterize
c. harper
d. Remove noise
Ans: b. Posterize
35. __________ joins groups of pixels into a single area of one color.
a. Smooth
b. Invert
c. Mosaic
d. Remove noise
Ans: c. Mosaic
36. _____________ helps to make the image transparent.

a. Smooth
b. Invert
c. Transparency
d. Remove noise
Ans: c. Transparency
37. ___________ helps to cut off the parts of the image without changing the scale of image.
a. Smooth
b. Cropping
c. Invert
d. Remove noise
Ans: b. Cropping
38. _________ helps to change the size of the image in a digital document.
a. Smooth
b. Invert
c. Keep Scale
Ans: c. Keep Scale
39. The size of the image changes when you specify in percentages __________.
a. Scale Width and Height
b. Resize
c. Nosize
Ans: a. Scale Width and Height
40. You can resize the image by selecting one of the corner handles and keep the _______ key
pressed while dragging the handle to its new position.
a. Ctrl
b. Shift
c. Alt
Ans: b. Shift
41. Color toolbar allow us to change

a. RGB Color Components
b. Brightness
c. Gamma effect of image
d. All of the above
42. Rotate option available on ________ toolbar.

a. Picture
b. Art
c. Drawing
Ans: c. Drawing
43. Which of the following is the correct method for opening the Picture toolbar?
a. View > Tools > Picture
b. Insert > Tools > Picture
c. View > Toolbars > Picture
d. Insert > Toolbars > Picture
Ans: c. View > Toolbars > Picture
44. In the Graphics mode of the picture toolbar, which of the following options is not available?
a. Grayscale
b. Black/White
c. Watermark
d. Original
Ans: d. Original
45. We can create temples in __________.

a. Writer
c. Spreadsheet
d. Impress
e. All of the above
46. A __________ is a model that you use to create other documents.

a. Document
b. Template
c. Design
Ans: b. Template
47. Which of the following does not allow the Templates dialogue to appear?
a. File>New>Template
b. File>Template>Manage Template
c. File>New>Text Document
Ans: c. File>New>Text Document
48. In Writer, you can make a Template by saving a document with the _____ extension.
a. .odt
b. .ott
c. .dbm
d. .ods
Ans: b. .ott
49. Document templates can contain ____________.

a. Text
b. Graphics
c. Style
d. All of the above

50. The ___________ is used to create a list of chapter names and page numbers at the beginning of a
content.
a. Index
b. Heading
c. Table of content
Ans: c. Table of content
51. To create a table of content automatically you have to give ___________ style.
a. Index
b. Content
c. Heading
Ans: c. Heading
52. Which options help to protect the table of content ____________.

a. Protected any time
b. Protected against manual changes
c. Always Protect the changes
Ans: b. Protected against manual changes
53. E#, E, T, #, LS,ES belong to which feature?

a. Mail Merge.
b. Indexes and Tables
c. Tables.
d. None of these.
Ans: b. Indexes and Tables
54. Which of the following tabs is not available in the insert Index/Table dialog box?
a. Entries
b. Styles
c. Background
Ans: d. None of the above
55. In Writer, which of the following levels of headers can be indexed?

a. H1
b. H2
c. H3
d. All of the above
56. __________ button represents the chapter number in the table of content.
a. E#
b. E
c. T
d. #
Ans: a. E#
57. ___________ button represents the entry text in the table of content.
a. E#
b. E
c. T
d. #
Ans: b. E
58. ___________ button represents the tab stop in the table of content.
a. E#
b. E
c. T
d. #
Ans: c. T
59. ___________ button represents the page number in the table of content.
a. E#
b. E
c. T
d. #
Ans: d. #
60. ___________ button represents the start of a hyperlink in the table of content.
a. E#
b. E
c. LS
d. #
Ans: c. LS
61. ___________ button represents the end of a hyperlink in the table of content.
a. E#
b. E
c. LE
d. #
Ans: c. LE
62. A _______________ is a method of sending a single letter to a large group of recipients.

a. Table of content
b. Mail Merge
c. Style
Ans: b. Mail Merge
63. Which help us to send the same letter to different persons?

a. Macros
b. Mail Merge
c. Template
d. None of above
Ans: b. Mail Merge
64. Amrita has just turned 14 years old. She intends to invite her friends and family to the gathering.
Which function will she employ to send the same invitation to a large number of individuals with
various addresses without having to type it over and again?
a. Mail Merge
b. Letter wizard
c. Document Type
d. None of these
Ans: a. Mail Merge

65. Which type of data format we can add in mail merge ____________.
a. .txt
b. .csv
c. .mdb
d. All of the above
66. A Cyber Awareness brochure must be created. Which of the Office Suite components should be
used to complete this task:
a. Spreadsheet
b. Digital Documentation
c. Database Management
d. Mail Merge
Ans: b. Digital Documentation
67. What is a style in a digital document? a. A collection of formatting attributes that can be applied
to text in a digital document
a. A collection of formatting attributes that can be applied to text in a digital document
b. The layout of a digital document
c. The content of a digital document
d. The size of a digital document
Ans: a. A collection of formatting attributes that can be applied to text in a digital document
68. Which of the following is not a formatting attribute that can be included in a style?
a. Font
b. Size
c. Shape
d. Spacing
Ans: c. Shape
69. How can styles help create a consistent look throughout a digital document?
a. They allow you to format text in the same way throughout the document
b. They ensure that headings and subheadings are formatted consistently
c. They make it easy to modify formatting throughout the document
d. All of the above
70. How do you apply a style to text in a digital document?

a. Right-click on the text and select the desired style from the style gallery
b. Use the formatting dialog box to apply the style
c. Select the text and press the Style button in the formatting toolbar
d. All of the above
71. How can you modify an existing style in a digital document?

a. Right-click on the style in the style gallery and select Modify
b. Use the Styles pane to make changes to the style
c. Apply the style to a portion of text, make the desired changes, and save the changes to the style
d. All of the above
72. Which of the following is not a way to create a new style in a digital document?
a. Right-click on a portion of text and select New Style
b. Use the Styles pane to create a new style
c. Copy an existing style and modify it to create a new style
d. All of the above
73. How can you remove a style from a digital document?

a. Delete the style from the style gallery
b. Remove all instances of the style from the document
c. Select the text with the style applied and choose Clear Formatting
d. All of the above
74. How can you view all of the styles in a digital document?
a. Use the Styles pane to view all of the styles
b. Use the Styles menu in the formatting toolbar to view all of the styles
c. Right-click on a portion of text and select View Styles
d. All of the above
Ans: a. Use the Styles pane to view all of the styles
75. What is the purpose of the Update Style feature in a digital document?
a. To update the formatting of all instances of a specific style in the document
b. To update the formatting of all styles in the document
c. To update the content of a specific style in the document
d. To update the content of all styles in the document
Ans: a. To update the formatting of all instances of a specific style in the document
76. How can you create a table of contents in a digital document using styles?
a. Apply heading styles to the sections of the document, and then use the Table of Contents feature
to generate the table of contents
b. Manually create the table of contents using text boxes and hyperlinks
c. Use the Index feature to create the table of contents
d. All of the above
Ans: a. Apply heading styles to the sections of the document, and then use the Table of Contents
feature to generate the table of contents
77. Which of the following is a benefit of using styles in a digital document?

a. It makes it easier to collaborate with others
b. It saves time by allowing you to format multiple sections of text at once
c. It ensures consistency in formatting throughout the document
d. All of the above
78. Which of the following is not a type of style in a digital document?

a. Paragraph
b. Character
c. Page
d. Font
Ans: d. Font
79. How can you apply a style to a numbered or bulleted list in a digital document?
a. Apply the style to each item in the list individually
b. Apply the style to the entire list
c. Styles cannot be applied to numbered or bulleted lists
Ans: b. Apply the style to the entire list
80. How can you customize the formatting of a style in a digital document?
a. Use the Modify Style feature to change the formatting attributes
b. Apply the style to a portion of text, make the desired changes, and save the changes to the style
c. Copy an existing style and modify it to create a new style with the desired formatting
d. All of the above
81. How can you rename a style in a digital document?

a. Use the Rename Style feature in the style gallery
b. Right-click on the style in the style gallery and choose Rename
c. Apply the style to a portion of text, change the name in the Styles pane, and save the changes to
the style
d. All of the above
Ans: b. Right-click on the style in the style gallery and choose Rename
82. How can you apply a style to all instances of a specific type of formatting in a digital document?
a. Use the Find and Replace feature to find all instances of the formatting and apply the style to
each one
b. Use the Select All feature to select all instances of the formatting, and then apply the style to the
selection
c. Styles cannot be applied to all instances of a specific type of formatting
Ans: b. Use the Select All feature to select all instances of the formatting, and then apply the style
to the selection
83. How can you change the order of styles in the style gallery in a digital document?
a. Drag and drop the styles to rearrange them
b. Use the Sort Styles feature in the style gallery
c. Apply the styles in the desired order, and they will be automatically rearranged in the style gallery
d. Styles cannot be rearranged in the style gallery
Ans: a. Drag and drop the styles to rearrange them
84. How can you customize the appearance of a style in the style gallery in a digital document?
a. Right-click on the style in the style gallery and choose Customize
b. Use the Styles pane to modify the appearance of the style
c. Use the Style Options feature in the style gallery
d. Styles cannot be customized in the style gallery
Ans: c. Use the Style Options feature in the style gallery
85. How can you delete a custom style in a digital document?

a. Right-click on the style in the style gallery and choose Delete
b. Apply the style to a portion of text, and then choose Delete from the Styles pane
c. Styles cannot be deleted once they have been created
Ans: a. Right-click on the style in the style gallery and choose Delete
86. Which of the following is NOT a font style in digital documents?

a. Bold
b. Italic
c. Regular
d. Underline
Ans: d. Underline

87. What is the shortcut key to make selected text bold in OpenOffice Writer?
a. Ctrl + B
b. Ctrl + U
c. Ctrl + I
d. Ctrl + K
Ans: a. Ctrl + B
88. Which of the following is NOT a type of paragraph alignment in digital documents?
a. Left-aligned
b. Right-aligned
c. Center-aligned
d. Top-aligned
Ans: d. Top-aligned
89. What is the shortcut key to center align selected text in Microsoft Word?
a. Ctrl + C
b. Ctrl + E
c. Ctrl + R
d. Ctrl + L
Ans: b. Ctrl + E
90. Which of the following is NOT a type of bullet point style in digital documents?
a. Round
b. Square
c. Triangle
d. Star
Ans: d. Star
91. Which of the following is a type of page orientation in digital documents?

a. Landscape
b. Portrait
c. Square
d. Vertical
Ans: a. Landscape
92. What is the shortcut key to undo the last action in digital documents?
a. Ctrl + Z
b. Ctrl + X
c. Ctrl + C
d. Ctrl + V
Ans: a. Ctrl + Z
93. Which of the following is a type of line spacing in digital documents?

a. Single
b. Double
c. Triple
d. Quadruple
Ans: b. Double
94. What is the shortcut key to save a digital document in Microsoft Word?
a. Ctrl + S
b. Ctrl + P
c. Ctrl + O
d. Ctrl + N
Ans: a. Ctrl + S
95. Which of the following is NOT a type of font size in digital documents?
a. 8pt
b. 12pt
c. 16pt
d. 20pt
Ans: c. 16pt
96. Which of the following is a type of font family in digital documents?

a. Arial
b. Bold
c. Italic
d. Underline
Ans: a. Arial
97. What is the shortcut key to select all text in a digital document?
a. Ctrl + A
b. Ctrl + X
c. Ctrl + C
d. Ctrl + V
Ans: a. Ctrl + A
98. Which of the following is a type of page border style in digital documents?
a. Solid
b. Dashed
c. Dotted
d. All of the above
99. What is the shortcut key to change the font size of selected text in OpenOffice Writer?
a. Ctrl + Shift + >
b. Ctrl + Shift + <
c. Ctrl + Shift + +
d. Ctrl + Shift +
Ans: b. Ctrl + Shift + <
100. Which of the following is NOT a type of font color in digital documents?
a. Blue
b. Red
c. Green
d. Yellow
Ans: d. Yellow
1. What are Styles ?. What are the advantages of using styles.

Answer Styles are pre-defined formatting attributes in digital document processing that can be used
to apply consistent formatting to text and other elements. The advantages of using styles include
 Consistency throughout the document
 Efficiency in formatting the document
 Flexibility in making changes to the document
 Improved accessibility for users with assistive technologies.

2. Give any four styles supported by OpenOffice.org
Answer OpenOffice.org supports various styles, including:
 Paragraph Styles: Used to format paragraphs, including indentation, line spacing, and
font size.
 Character Styles: Used to format individual characters, including font type, size, color,
and style.
 Page Styles: Used to format the overall appearance of a page, including margins,
headers, and footers.
 List Styles: Used to format bulleted or numbered lists, including the type of bullet or
number, indentation, and spacing.
3. What is the best way to load styles from a template or another document?
Answer
You can copy styles by loading them from a template or another document, for example:
1. Open the document into which you wish to paste the styles.
2. In the Styles and Formatting window, click on Load Styles after long-clicking on the
arrow next to the New Style from Selection symbol.
3. Locate and choose the template you wish to copy styles from in the Load Styles
window
4. Choose the style categories you want to copy. If you want the copied styles to
overwrite any styles with the same names in the document you re putting them into,
select Overwrite.
5. To copy styles from another document, click the From File button to bring up a box
where you may choose the required file.
4. How can you modify the style?

Answer Styles can be changed in a variety of ways in OpenOffice.org.
Load or copy styles from another document or template
Update a style from a selection
5. How can we create our own styles?

Answer There are two different ways to create a style
 Creating a new style from a selection You can copy a new style from an existing
style. This new style will only be applied to this document and will not be saved in the
template.
 Dragging And Dropping To Create A Style You can drag and drop a text selection
into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new style.
6. Explain any five Graphic filters.

Answer The following are four graphic filters:
a. Invert Changing the color in the color image, and giving brightness in grayscale image.
b. Solarization Increasing the effects of excessive light in a photograph.
c. Posterize Reduces the number of colours in a picture to make it look like a painting.
d. Charcoal The image is displayed as a charcoal sketch.
e. Mosaic Combines groupings of pixels into a single colour area.
7. Explain Image Cropping

Answer Image cropping is the process of removing unwanted parts of an image by selecting and
keeping a specific portion of the image while discarding the rest. Method for cropping image are
right-click the image and choose Picture from the pop-up menu to begin cropping it. Select the Crop
page in the Picture dialogue box.
The following parameters can be controlled on the Crop page:
Keep scale / Keep image size

1. When Keep scale is chosen (the default), cropping the image has no effect on the
image s scale.
2. Cropping creates enlargement (for positive cropping values), shrinking (for negative
cropping values), or distortion of the image when Keep image size is selected, so the
image size remains constant.
Left, Right, Top, and Bottom
You can crop the image using the dialog box, you can enter left, right, top and bottom margins to crop
the image.
1. Keep scale using this option you can crop the image without changing the size of the
image.
2. Keep image size Without changing the height and width of the image you can crop
the image using keep image size.
8. List any three methods of inserting images in a text document.

Answer The three methods for inserting images in digital documents are
 Drag and Drop
 Inserting image from clipboard
 Insert image from Scanner
9. What do you understand by the terms:

a. Text Wrapping
b. Anchoring
Answer
a. Text Wrapping Text wrapping describes the relationship between graphics and the surrounding
text, which may wrap around the graphic on one or both sides, be overprinted behind or in front of the
graphic, or be overprinted behind or in front of the graphic.
b. Anchoring The graphics reference point is referred to as IT. This point could represent the
object s location on the page or in the frame. An anchor point is always present in an image.
10. What are templates? What are the advantages of using templates?
Answer A template is a type of document that you can use to make a similar type of document.
Templates can contain text, graphics, style, design.
Advantage of template are
a. Document creation is made easier with templates.
b. It save time to giving style in document
c. The use of templates helps to keep the audience s interest.
11. What is the difference between styles and templates?
Answer
a. Style Styles ensure that your formatting is consistent throughout a document.
b. Template Templates allow you to reuse text and maintain a consistent look and feel across many
projects.
12. Explain different ways of creating a template.

Answer There are two ways to create templates in a document.
Creating a template from a document
1. Create or edit a new or existing document of the type you wish to use as a template.
2. Fill in the blanks with the content and styles you desire.
3. Select File > Templates > Save from the main menu.
Creating a template using a wizard
Wizards can be used to construct letter, fax, agenda, presentation, and Web page templates. The Fax
Wizard, for example, walks you through the following options:
1. Fax machine type (business or personal)
2. Document components such as the date, topic line (for business faxes), salutation, and closing

3. Information about the sender and receiver options (business fax)
4. Inclusion of text in the footer (business fax)
13. What do you mean by table of content?

Answer The table of contents tool in Writer allows you to create an automated table of contents
from your document s headings.
Many of the elements are used in table of content
a. E# It indicate chapter number
b. E It represents the entry text
c. T It represents tab stop
d. LS It represents start of a hyperlink
e. LE It represents End of a hyperlink
14. Explain Mail Merge.

Answer A mail merge is a method of personalizing a message you ve written and sending it to a
large group of people, giving the impression that you prepared the letter specifically for them.
15. What are the advantages of Mail Merge?

Answer Advantages of mail merge are
a. It s simple to send the same mail to a big group of recipients using the Mail Merge tool.
b. We don t have to type each recipient s name separately in each letter when we use Mail Merge.
c. It s one of the most efficient ways to mass-produce hundreds of personalized letters in a short
amount of time.
d. It is simple to amend the letter because any change made in the main letter will be reflected in all
other recipients letters.
16. Give examples of databases in which the Data Source can be created.
Answer Any database that supports Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) can be utilized as a data
source. They can also be made in spreadsheets using Excel, or other similar software.
For example
a. Spreadsheet
b. Text file
c. CSV file
d. OpenOffice base or Access
17. Explain the concept of styles in digital documents and how they are useful for formatting
text and paragraphs.
Answer Styles in digital documents are a useful feature that enables users to apply a predefined set
of formatting options to text and paragraphs in a single click. A style can encompass font size,
typeface, color, paragraph spacing, alignment, and other formatting options. Consistent use of styles
throughout a document can help ensure a consistent and polished appearance, enhance readability,
and save time by avoiding manual formatting changes. Overall, styles are a powerful tool that can
significantly improve the efficiency and effectiveness of digital document processing.
18. How can styles be used to create a table of contents in a digital document?
Answer To create a table of contents in a digital document, styles can be utilized by assigning
particular styles to headings and subheadings throughout the document. By applying the Heading 1
style to primary section headings and the Heading 2 style to subheadings, users can generate an
automatic table of contents that lists all of the document s sections and subsections in a structured and
organized manner.
This saves time and effort since users don t have to manually create a table of contents, and it also
ensures that the document is consistent and easy to navigate for the reader. In short, using styles to
create a table of contents is a powerful feature of digital documents that improves the overall
readability and usability of the document.
19. How can the use of styles help to improve the accessibility of a digital document?
Answer Styles are an effective means of enhancing the accessibility of digital documents as they
provide a consistent structure and formatting that is easy for users with visual impairments to
navigate. By utilizing styles to define headings and subheadings, document creators can establish a
clear hierarchy of information that can be interpreted effectively by screen readers.
This results in a document that is more user-friendly and inclusive, as it enables individuals with
visual impairments to easily access and understand the content. Ultimately, incorporating styles into
digital documents can have a positive impact on the overall accessibility and usability of the
document, which is a crucial consideration in today s increasingly diverse and inclusive society.
20. How can the use of styles improve the efficiency of document creation and editing?
Answer Styles can enhance the efficiency of document creation and editing by enabling users to
quickly and easily apply formatting options to text and paragraphs. By defining a set of styles that
reflect the formatting options commonly used in the document, users can swiftly apply those styles to
text and paragraphs with a single click, streamlining the process and saving time.
This feature allows for consistency in formatting, reduces the possibility of errors, and improves the
overall productivity of document creation and editing. In summary, using styles is a powerful tool
that significantly enhances the efficiency of digital document processing.
21. How can styles be used to ensure consistency in a collaborative digital document?
Answer Using styles in a collaborative digital document can ensure consistency by defining a set of
agreed-upon formatting options. This allows all collaborators to use the same styles throughout the
document, resulting in a consistent appearance and better readability.
22. How can styles be used to format text or paragraphs in a way that reflects the document s
purpose or audience?
Answer Users can use styles to ensure that the digital document effectively communicates its
message by applying styles that reflect its purpose or target audience. Furthermore, they can modify
existing styles or create new ones to satisfy the document s unique requirements. This approach
results in a more readable and engaging document that is tailored to its intended purpose.
23. What is a table of contents in a digital document, and how can it benefit the reader?
Answer A table of contents in a digital document is a list of the document s sections or chapters
with corresponding page numbers or hyperlinks. It provides an overview of the document s structure
and helps the reader navigate the document quickly and easily. By using a table of contents, the
reader can locate specific sections of the document without having to manually search for them,
saving time and improving the reading experience.
24. How can a table of contents be created and formatted in a digital document?
Answer To create and format a table of contents in a digital document, users can follow these steps:
 Assign unique heading styles to each section or chapter of the document.
 Insert a table of contents using the appropriate option from the menu or toolbar.
 Customize the table of contents by choosing the desired style and formatting options to
match the document s design and layout.
 Update the table of contents whenever changes are made to the document s structure
or content to ensure its accuracy and usefulness to the reader.
25. What are some best practices for creating a table of contents in a digital document?
Answer When creating a table of contents in a digital document, it is important to use descriptive
and accurate section or chapter headings, update the table of contents as changes are made to the
document, use accurate hyperlinks or page numbers, customize the formatting to match the
document s design, and test the table of contents to ensure it is user-friendly and easy to navigate.

26. How can the use of a table of contents benefit the author of a digital document?
Answer Using a table of contents can be advantageous for the writer of a digital document in
various ways. By presenting a structured and well-organized summary of the document s content, the
writer can ensure that the document is easily comprehensible and coherent. Consequently, this can
save time and minimize the possibility of mistakes that may arise when the reader has to search for
particular sections or chapters manually.
Multiple Choice Questions
1. Which among the following is not a valid type of alignment ?

a. Middle b. Right c. Justify d. None of these
2. On which tab does the paragraph dialog box launcher exist ?

a. Page Tab b. View Tab c. Home Tab d. Insert Tab
3. The process of increasing or decreasing the space between the left and right margin
of a paragraph is known as a. Alignment b. Indentation c. Spacing d. None
of these
4. The default tab space is ..

a. 0.5 b. 1.25 c. 1.50 d. 1.15
5. Name the Key which on pressing closes the header section .

a. Esc b. Shift c. Alt d. None of these
6. Which option on the Design tab helps in exiting from the header section ?
a. Exit Header/ Footer b. Close Header/ Footer
c. Close Header and Footer d.Exit Header and Footer
7. Which option insert the date in the header section as a field so that it always reflects
the current date?
a. Update current date b. Update automatically c.Auto-update d. None of these
8. The .. option on the Design tab helps in inserting page numbers in the
header section .
a. Insert Page Number b. Page Number c. Add page Number d. None of these
9. option contains predefined footer styles .

a. Footer b. Insert c. Style d. None of these
10. Which tab contain the Close Header and Footer option ?
a. Home b. Design c. Page Layout d. Insert
11. The option in the styles task pane creates any style with the
formatting of your choice .
a. New Style b. Create New Style c. Create Style d. None of these
12. The button in Manage Style dialog box helps in editing any
predefined style.
a. Edit b. Edit Style c. Modify d. Modify Style

Fill in the Blanks :
1. A is a predefined combination of various formatting features

and types.
Ans: Style
2. . are used to describe the location at which the cursor stops after the Tab
Key is pressed .
Ans: Tab Stop
3. type of alignment places the text evenly between the left and the
right margins .
Ans: Justify
4. indent controls how the text of a paragraph lines up below the first
line .
Ans: First Line Indent
5. can be used to insert the title at the top of each page.

Ans: Header
6. Header option is available under the . Group on the Insert tab .

Ans: Header & Footer
7. To insert a picture in a header, click on the . Option on the

. Tab .
Ans: Picture, Design
8. can be used to insert page numbers at the bottom of each page.

Ans: Footer
9. Footer option is available under the Header & Footer group on the
. Tab.
Ans : Insert
Multiple Choice Questions :
1. By default, the option is selected when we click on the File > New
option.
a. Blank document b. Document c. New document d. None of these
2. While saving a document as template, what option needs to be selected in the save as
type list box ?
a.Template b.Word Template c. Save Template d. None of these
3. Which option helps in creating a template based on the existing template ?

a.Template from existing b. New from existing c.New template from existing
d.None of these
1. Microsoft Word provides a feature of using the predefined that

are formatting in someway with the sample content, themes, etc.
Ans : Template
2. A template can be created in word by saving a document as a .. file.
Ans : Word Template
3. Clicking on the option displays the recently used templates .

Ans : Recent Templates
1. Which type of alignment places the text evenly between the left and the right margins
?
a. Justify b.Even c. Center d. None of these
2. Which tab in the paragraph dialog box is selected by default when paragraph dialog
box launcher is clicked on ?
a.Line and page b. Indents and Spacing c.Page Layout d.None of these
3. How many types of indents are there in Word ?

a.2 b.3 c. 4 d. 5
4. . Is the vertical distance between successive lines of the text in a

document .
a.Paragraph Spacing b.Word Spacing c.Text Spacing d.Line Spacing
5. You can close the Header section by .

a.Double-Clicking in the main document b.Pressing the Esc Key c.Both a and
b d.None of these
6. By which option can we insert date in the Header section so that it always reflects the
current date ?
a.Insert current Date/Time b.Update date automatically c.Update automatically
d.None of these
7.Which option is used to exit from the Header section ?

a.Close Header and Footer b.Close Header c.Exit Header and Footer d.Exit
Header
8. On which tab does the Footer option exist ?

a.Insert b.Header and Footer c. Home d. None of these
9. which option in the styles task pane allows the user to edit any style based on the
specific requirement for the document ?
a.Manager Styles b.Edit style c. Modify d. None of these
10. With which extension does a template gets saved in Word ?

a. .dotx b. .dott c. Both a and b d. None of these
1. are used to break continuous text to one or more sentences.

Ans: Text Wrapping
2. Information like the title of a book or chapter can be placed in

.. area of a document
Ans: Header
3. The shortcut key combination to close the Word document is .

Ctrl+F4
4. The term refers to a preset format for a document or file.

Ans: Template
State True or False :
1. By default , there is one-line gap between paragraphs. ( ) False

2. Microsoft Word provides five types of alignment. ( ) False
3. Hanging indent indents the first line of a paragraph. ( ) True
4. Header and Footer are the identifiers that respectively run across the top and bottom
of the document. ( ) True
5. Word does not allow to add page numbers in the Header section of a document. (
) False
6. Different paragraph styles grab and hold the attention of the readers. ( ) True
7. Create New style option allows you to create any style with the formatting of your
choice. ( ) True
8. A template can be created in two ways. ( ) True
9. New from existing option is present in the Available templates section. ( ) True
1. If you would like to start a new page in a document, you can use the option
.
a. Line Break b.Section Break c. Page Break d. Paragraph
2. You can use the .. key combination to create a page break

at the pointed location.
a. Shift +Enter b. Ctrl +Enter c. Alt +Enter d. None of these
3. To insert a column break, select the breaks button on the . Tab.

a. Insert b. Home c. Page Layout d. Design
4. This feature facilitates the organization of the text around the objects embedded on a
page.
a. Word Wrap b. Column Break c. Next page d. Text Wrapping
5. To show a section / page breaks, select the .. option on the Home

tab.
a. View b. Display c. Show / Hide d. None of these

1 .By using page break , you can create different .
Ans: Pages
2. The shortcut key for page break is .

Ans: Ctrl+Enter
3. To create a new page, you can keep on pressing the key till the
cursor moves from line to line and a new page starts .

Ans: Enter
4. To show a section / page break, click on the option on the Home

tab.
Ans: Show/Hide
5. To remove the section Break / Page break on a text , press . On

your keyboard.
Ans: Delete

1. The . Option is used to change the background colour of the text .
a. Font color b. Text Highlight Color c. Both a or b d. None of the above
2. The option places the text slightly lower than the normal text position.
a. Subscript b. Superscript c. Strikethrough d. Font Size
3. On selecting the . ,the first character in all the words of the

selected sentence will be converted to capital letters .
a. Uppercase b.Sentence case c. Toggle case d. Capitalize Each Word
4. The change case option is present under the home tab in the
group.
a. Paragraph b.Styles c. Font d. Insert
1. . Option is used to change the style of the text. (Font)

2. .. option is used to change the background colour of the
text. (Text Highlight Color)
3. After selecting the text, click on the icon in the Font group to
make the font size smaller than the current font size by the specified point. (Font Size)
4. To remove the character formatting, select the text and click on in
the font group.(Clear Formatting)
5. In .. case, the first character of the selected sentence will be
converted to capital letter . (Sentence Case)
6. On the home tab in the font group , select the . Icon to make
the selected text higher than the normal text position. (Superscript)

1. To insert an image from a file, click on the Insert tab and select the
. Button in the illustrations group.
a. Image b.Picture c. Shapes d. Screenshot
2. Word can import types of image file formats.

a.GIF b.JPEG c. BMP d. All of these
3. To copy and paste the image in MS word , the option is used .

a.Ctrl X + Ctrl V b.Ctrl X + Ctrl C c. Ctrl C + Ctrl V d. Ctrl V + Ctrl C
4. The Clip Art option is present under the . Tab in the illustrations
group.
a.Insert b.Home c. Text d. Design

1. .. is a collection of picture or images that can be imported into a
document . (ClipArt)
2. Clip Art option is available in the . Group . (Illustrations)
3. .. is a process of reducing the file size of the digital image while
maintaining the image .(Compress Picture)

1. The Wrap text option is present under the .. tab in the Arrange
group .
a. Format / Page Layout b. Design / Format c. Review / Page Layout d.View /
Page Layout
2. enlarges the first character of a line to on extent that it drop-down

by two or more line.
a. Wrap Text b. Drop Text c. Word Text d. None of these
3. The Word Art gallery has .. font styles to choose from .

a. 10 b. 20 c. 30 d. 40
4. The default text wrapping for a picture is the following.

a. In front of text b. Behind Text c. In line with text d. Top and Bottom

1. . Is a text formatting feature, which enlarges the first character of a
line to an extent that it drops down by two or more lines. (Drop Text)
2. After you have inserted the picture , you can wrap the text by using the
. Option in the Arrange group under the tab. (Text
Wrapping, Format)
3. The default text wrapping for a picture is . (Inline with

Text)

1. You can insert .. file formats within a Word processor document.
a. PDF File b.Excel Spreadsheet c. Power Point Presentation d. All of these
2. To embed an Excel spreadsheet in a word document , select the insert tab and click
on the .
a. Text Box b.Quick Parts c. Drop Cap d. Object
3. If you like to edit an embedded document, you have to . On it.

a. Right click b. Double- Click c. Left- click d. Single click
1. You can insert a PDF file or a spreadsheet within the Word processor , using the
.. option. (Object)
2. To insert an object, go to the insert tab and click on the object option present in the
. Group . (Text)
3. To open an embedded document, . On it. (Double Click)

1. To insert stars, banners, callouts, connectors, etc., click on the ..
option in the Insert tab.
a. Symbols b.Pictures c. Shapes d. All of these
2. You can insert a symbol by clicking on the Symbol option present under the
.. tab.
a. Home b.Design c. Illustration d. Insert
3. The 3-D rotation button is present under the drop- down

menu.
a. 3D Effects b. Shape Fill c. Shape Outline d. Shape Styles

1. You can insert , basic geometric shapes, arrows, equation shapes, flowchat shapes,
stars, banners, and callouts, using the shapes option in the ..
group. (Illustrations)
2. Symbol option is available in the . Group on the Insert

tab.(Symbols)
3. If you like to view more symbols and special characters to insert into a document,
click on the option . (Symbol)
Multiple choice Questions :

1. The . Option is used to change the style of the text .
a. Font Color b. Font Style c. Font Size d. Font Face
2. The default text wrapping for a picture is :

a. Tight b. In Line with Text c. Through d. Square
3. In . , the first character in all the words of the selected sentence will
be converted to capital letters.
a.Uppercase b.Lowercase c.Capitalize Each Word d. Sentence
4.You can use the Key combination to create a page break at the
pointed location.
a. Ctrl+Shift+Enter b. Shift+Enter c. Ctrl+Enter d.Ctrl+Shift+F1
5. Word 2010 offers which of the following page break options ?

a. Page b. Text Wrapping c. Next page d. Both a and b
6. Image compression is a process of .. the file size of the digital

image and maintaining the image quality.
a. Increasing b.Brightening c. Reducing d. Maintaining
7. Word process allows the user to insert lines, basic geometric shapes, arrows, stars,
banners, and callouts in the document by using the option.
a. Pictures b. Chart c. Symbol d. Shapes
8. Some of the options present under shape Fill are :

a. Pictures b.Texture c. Gradient d. All of these above

9. If you embed an object, the size of your document
significantly and this may cause problems in e- mailing the documentas an attachment.
a. Increase b. Decrease c. Remains the same d. None of the above
1. In case, the first character in all the words of the selected

sentence will be converted to capital letter. (Capitalize each word)
2. The icon on the Home tab in the Font group is used to make the
selected text higher than the normal text position. (Superscript)
3. . Case is used to convert the small letters in the selected text to

capital letters and vice versa (Toggle case)
4. . Allows you to place text behind an image, in front of an

image or around an image. (Text Wrapping)
5 .. feature enlarges the first character of a line to an extent that

it drops down by two or more lines. (Drop Cap)
6. . An object in Microsoft Word, rather than simply inserting or

pasting it, ensures that the object retain its original format. (Embed)
7. To insert different shapes in a word document, click on the shapes button in the
group on the insert tab. (Illustrations)
8. To insert a picture in a word document, select the Insert tab>

. Option. (Picture)
9. is a process of reducing the file size of the digital image while

maintaining the image quality. (Image Compression)
State True or False :

1. You can insert a PDF file, Excel spreadsheet, power point presentation , or a sound
file within the Word processor. ( ) True
2. You cannot embed objects created in other programs into a Word documents.( ) False
3. The Grow Font option is used to make the font size smaller than the current font size
by the specified point.( ) False
4 Odd page option is the category of section breaks. ( ) True
5. You can only insert the images from the clip art gallery built-in-within the word
processor. ( ) False
6. Some of the Wrap Text options available MS word are square, Tight, and Through. (
) True
7. The continuous category of section breaks starts the new section on the next page. (
) False
8. You can add text inside the shapes by right-clicking on them and selecting the Add
text option.( ) True
9. The default text wrapping for a picture is Through. ( ) False
10. A person opening your document must have the relevant software loaded on his
computer to operate the embedded file. ( ) True
11. Paragraphs are used to break continuous text to one or more sentences. This
enhances the readability of the content.True

12. Paragraph formatting is the most important factor in the overall appearance of a
document. True
13. Alignment is the systematic placement of text within a section of a document to
enhance its readability. It determines the appearance and orientation of the edges of the
paragraphs. True

ELECTRONIC SPREADSHEET (ADVANCED)
REVISION NOTES
ANALYZE DATA USING SCENARIOS AND GOAL SEEK
Data Consolidation
In OpenOffice, data consolidation refers to the combining of data from various sources or sheets into
a single area for easy analysis and manipulation. It helps when working with data that is spread across
multiple files or sheets and enhances productivity, accuracy, and decision-making abilities.
Advantages of using Consolidation Data

 Saves time by combining information from various sources into one document.
 reduces the possibility of errors that could happen when manually copying data, which
increases accuracy.
 allows you to examine and interact with the combined data in one place, which
improves efficiency.
 improves decision-making by giving a thorough perspective of the data.
 Having all the data in one location makes it simpler to share it with other people.
Consolidation Data Window

To use the Consolidate tool in OpenOffice, follow these steps:
1. Open a new or existing spreadsheet in OpenOffice.
2. Select the cell where you want the consolidated data to appear.
3. Click on Data > Consolidate from the menu bar.
4. In the Consolidate dialog box, select the range of cells or sheets you want to
consolidate.
5. Choose the function you want to use to consolidate the data (such as sum or average).
6. Specify any additional settings, such as whether to include labels or empty cells.
7. Click OK to consolidate the data.
Creating Subtotal in Electronic Spreadsheet

Subtotal in OpenOffice electronic spreadsheet refers to a function that calculates the subtotal of a
range of values within a list or table. This function can be used to summarize data by category or
group, allowing you to quickly see the total for each group.

Advantages of using Subtotal in OpenOffice electronic spreadsheet:
 Easy data analysis by grouping and summarizing data based on criteria.
 Improved accuracy by automating subtotal calculations and reducing errors.
 Increased efficiency by saving time and effort.
 Enhanced organization by grouping data into categories and subcategories.
 Customizable grouping and calculation criteria for flexibility in data analysis.
SubTotal Window
To use the Subtotal function in OpenOffice, follow these steps:
2. Select the range of data you want to subtotal.
3. Click on Data > Subtotals from the menu bar.
4. In the Subtotals dialog box, select the column you want to group by and the function
you want to use (such as sum or count).
5. Click OK to apply the subtotals.
Using What-if Scenarios in Electronic Spreadsheet

Scenarios in OpenOffice electronic spreadsheet refer to a feature that allows you to create and
compare different sets of data to explore different outcomes or possibilities. Scenarios are useful
when you want to explore how changes in data will affect your calculations, such as in financial
modeling or forecasting.
What is use of What-if in scenario

what-if analysis in scenarios, you can test different possibilities and explore the potential impact of
changes to your data, helping you make more informed decisions.
Advantages of using Scenarios in OpenOffice electronic spreadsheet:
 Allows you to explore different outcomes or possibilities based on changes to your
data.
 Helps you to better understand your data and make more informed decisions.
 Particularly useful in financial modeling, forecasting, and other areas where you need
to explore the impact of different variables on your data.
 Provides a way to compare and contrast different sets of data and their potential
impact.
 Can save time by allowing you to easily create and test different scenarios.

To use Scenarios in OpenOffice, follow these steps:
2. Enter the original data that you want to use as the basis for your scenarios.
3. Click on Tools > Scenarios from the menu bar.
4. In the Scenarios dialog box, click on Add to create a new scenario.
5. Give your scenario a name and select the cells you want to vary in your scenario.
6. Enter the new values for each cell in your scenario.
7. Click OK to save your scenario.
8. Repeat steps 4-7 to create additional scenarios.
9. To compare scenarios, click on Tools > Scenarios and select the scenarios you want to
compare.
Goal Seek in Electronic Spreadsheet

Goal Seek in electronic spreadsheet refers to a feature that allows you to find the input value needed
to achieve a specific output value. This can be useful when you know the desired result of a
calculation, but you are not sure what input value is needed to achieve that result.
For example, you might use Goal Seek to determine what interest rate is needed to pay off a loan in a
specific amount of time, or what sales volume is needed to achieve a certain profit margin.
To use Goal Seek in an electronic spreadsheet, follow these steps:

1. Enter the formula that you want to use in the cell where you want the output value to
appear.
2. Enter an initial value for the input cell that you want to change.
3. Click on Tools > Goal Seek from the menu bar.

4. In the Goal Seek dialog box, enter the output value you want to achieve and select the
cell containing the input value you want to change.
5. Click OK to run the Goal Seek analysis.
6. The Goal Seek feature will calculate the value needed to achieve the desired output
and update the input cell with the new value.
Solver in Electronic Spreadsheet

The Solver is a more advanced version of Goal Seek. While Goal Seek is designed to find a single
variable solution, Solver can handle equations with multiple unknown variables. It is used to find the
best possible outcome that meets a set of defined conditions, such as minimizing or maximizing a
particular result based on a set of rules or constraints that you define.
Solver example
Consider investing $10,000 over the course of a year in two mutual funds. Fund X is a lower risk
fund with an interest rate of 8%, whereas Fund Y has a greater risk interest rate of 12%. How much
should be put into each fund in order to generate a total interest of $1,000?
Difference between goal seek and solver

Goal Seek Solver
Find a single variable solution to Find an optimal solution to a problem

Purpose
a problem with multiple variables
Input
One input variable Multiple input variables
variables
Finds the value of the input Finds the best combination of input
Output variable that produces a specific variable values that meet a set of
output conditions or constraints
Problem Simple problems with one Complex problems with multiple

complexity unknown variable unknown variables and constraints
Algorithm Iterative method Optimization algorithm
Minimize, maximize, or target a specific

Optimization None
value
Constraints None Multiple constraints can be added

LINK DATA AND SPREADSHEETS
You may also link cells from several worksheets and spreadsheets to summarise data from numerous
sources using spreadsheets. This allows you to build formulas that combine data from several sources
and perform computations using both linked and local data.
Inserting New Sheet

When you open a new spreadsheet, it usually contains three sheet named Sheet1, Sheet2 and Sheet3.
If you want to insert a new sheet into the spreadsheet, there are different methods you can use.
Steps for Creating New Sheet
1. Choose Insert > Sheet from the menu bar,
2. Insert the sheet by right-clicking on the tab,
3. Click in the empty area at the end of the sheet tabs.
Renaming Sheets
 Step 1 : Double-click on the name of a current worksheet.
 Step 2 : Use the context menu that appears when you right-click on the name of an
existing worksheet to select Rename.
 Step 3 : Click on the worksheet tab to choose the worksheet you want to rename, and
then choose the Sheet option from the Format menu. The Rename option should be
chosen from the submenu that is displayed when you do this.
Cell Reference
Cell referencing in a spreadsheet is the process of referring to a specific cell or range of cells within a
worksheet by using a unique identifier. This unique identifier is called a cell reference and it is made
up of a combination of a column letter and a row number that identifies the location of a particular
cell.
There are two ways to reference cells in other sheets
1. Creating The Reference With The Mouse
2. Creating The Reference With The Keyboard.
Creating The Reference With The Mouse

Both spreadsheets must be open in order to construct the reference with the mouse. Choose the cell
where the formula will be entered.
Creating The Reference With The Keyboard

Referencing It s easy to enter a cell reference using the keyboard in a formula. The reference consists
of three parts:
 Path and file name
 Sheet name
 Cell
Example = file:///Path &File Name #$SheetName.CellName.
Working with Hyperlinks

In Calc, you can utilise hyperlinks to navigate between spreadsheet cells and to other areas of the
same or different files, websites, or even other spreadsheets.
Hyperlinks can be stored within your file as either relative or absolute.
Relative And Absolute Hyperlinks

Relative and absolute hyperlinks are used in spreadsheet applications, such as OpenOffice Calc, to
create links between cells or other resources within the same spreadsheet or to external files and web
pages.
a. Relative Hyperlinks Relative hyperlinks are links that are specified in relation to the current
cell s location. They typically use a path that is relative to the current file s location. For example, if
you are currently on cell A1 and you want to link to cell B1 in the same sheet, you can use the
relative hyperlink B1 .
b. Absolute Hyperlinks Absolute hyperlinks, on the other hand, specify the full path or URL of the
resource being linked to. For example, to link to a web page located at
https://cbseskilleducation.com/information-technology-class-10-notes/ , you can use the absolute
hyperlink https://cbseskilleducation.com/information-technology-class-10-notes/ .
Linking to External Data

To insert external data, such as tables from HTML documents or named ranges from other
spreadsheets, into OpenOffice Calc, you can use the External Data dialog or the Navigator.
1. Using the External Data dialog: Go to Data > External Data , select the source of
the data, and choose the specific data to insert. You can link to the external data or
copy it into your spreadsheet.
2. Using the Navigator: Click on the Navigator icon or press F5, expand the Data
Sources section, select the source of the data, and drag and drop the table or named
range into your spreadsheet.
SHARING WORKSHEET DATA

Spreadsheet software gives users the option to share and store workbooks in a network location so
that numerous users can view the same workbook at once. This function helps users collaborate more
effectively by increasing the efficiency of data entering.
Setting up a Spreadsheet for Sharing

You can create a spreadsheet at any moment and share it with others. Open the spreadsheet document
and select Tools > Share Document to enable the document s collaborative features. You can choose
whether to activate or disable sharing from a dialogue that appears.
Record Changes

You may track changes made to a spreadsheet by yourself or other users using the Record Changes
option in OpenOffice Calc. When working on a spreadsheet with others, reviewing and editing data,
and keeping track of multiple people s edits, this capability comes in handy.
Any changes you make to the spreadsheet are noted in the document and recorded when the Record
Changes option is turned on in OpenOffice Calc.
Turned on Record Changes featue ON
 Open the Spreadsheet
 Click on Edit > Changes > Record
 Now, You can start Editing the worksheet
Viewing Changes
Calc gives the control over the spread sheet to view the changes you or other have done in
Worksheet. To change the available filters, select Edit > Changes > Show. The following dialog
opens.
In OpenOffice Calc, you can view changes made to a spreadsheet using the Record Changes
feature.
 Date filter: Shows only the changes made within a specified time range.
 Author filter: Displays changes made by a specific person, which is useful when
multiple reviewers are working on the worksheet.
 Range filter: Shows only changes made within a specific range of cells, helpful for
large spreadsheets.
 Comment filter: Displays changes that have comments matching the search criteria.
 Show accepted changes: Displays only the changes that you have accepted.
 Show rejected changes: Displays only the changes that you have rejected.
Accepting or Rejecting Changes

You have the choice to accept or reject the changes once you ve done editing the document. When
changes are accepted, they are made permanent parts of the document; when changes are rejected, the
document returns to the way it was before the changes were made.
1. Go to the Edit menu and select Changes followed by Accept or Reject.
2. In the Accept or Reject Changes dialog box, you can either accept or reject changes
one-by-one or all at once.
Merging Worksheets

Merging worksheets in OpenOffice Calc is a feature that allows you to combine two or more
worksheets into a single worksheet. This is useful when you have data spread across multiple
worksheets that you want to consolidate into a single worksheet for analysis or reporting purposes.
 Open the Worksheet
 Select Edit > Changes > Merge Document
 Select the file from selection dialog box
 Use Accept or Reject changes
Comparing Document
You can compare two or more spreadsheets in OpenOffice Calc using a feature called Document
Comparison to find discrepancies between them. This can be helpful when you want to evaluate
edits made to a spreadsheet by another person or when you want to compare two spreadsheet versions
for inconsistencies or errors.
 Open worksheet
 Select Edit > Compare Document
 Select the original worksheet
 Now, You can find the changes
CREATE AND USE MICROS IN SPREADSHEET

Using Micors
A macro in OpenOffice is a set of commands or keystrokes that are stored for later usage. Macro
might be simple, like inputting an address automatically, or sophisticated, like automating a sequence
of calculations. Because the OpenOffice macro language is so flexible, users can automate a variety
of processes. When repetitive actions need to be carried out repeatedly in the same manner, macros
are especially helpful.
Advantages of Micro
 The repetitive and routine processes are automated by macros.
 Macros save your time
Creating Macro in Spreadsheet

 Open Worksheet
 Click on Tools > Macros > Record Macro
 Click on Start/Stop recording

ELECTRONIC SPREADSHEET (ADVANCED)
1. ______________ allows you to combine data from multiple worksheets into a single master
worksheet.
a. Data Consolidation
b. Multiple Data
c. Scenarios
d. Goal Seek
Ans: a. Data Consolidation
2. _______________series of worksheets or workbooks summarizes it into a single worksheet.

a. Multiple Data
b. Data Consolidation
c. Scenarios
d. Goal Seek
Ans: b. Data Consolidation
3. Which function cannot be performed through Subtotal in a Spreadsheet?

a. Sum
b. Product
c. Average
d. Percentage
Ans: d. Percentage
4. Scenarios are a tool to test questions.

a. Auto
b. Goal Seek
c. What-if
d. Drop Down
Ans: c. What-if
5. When making a watermark or putting an image in the backdrop of a document, __________ comes
in useful.
a. Transparency
b. Fill
c. Filters
d. Crop
Ans: a. Transparency
6. It refers to a cell or a range of cells on a worksheet and can be used to find the values or data that
you want a formula to calculate.
a. Row
b. Column
c. Autosum
d. Cell Reference
Ans: d. Cell Reference
7. __________, totals/adds data arranged in an array that is, a group of cells with labels for columns
and/or rows Which step one must follow before using the Subtotal option?
a. Consolidate

b. Rename Data
c. Filter Data
d. Subtotal
Ans: d. Subtotal
8. A ______ hyperlink contains the full address of the destination file or web page.
a. Relative
b. Absolute
c. Mixed
d. Address
Ans: b. Absolute
9. Which of the following reflects the importance of Goal Seek?

a. Subtotal
b. Scenario
c. Solver
d. Consolidate
Ans: c. Solver
10. _________ means combining data in a spreadsheet from different worksheets into master
worksheet
a. Hyperlinks
b. Consolidating
c. Linking
d. Filter
Ans: b. Consolidating
11. An __________ link will stop working only if the target is moved while a__________ link will
stop working only if the start and target locations change relative to each other.
a. absolute, fixed
b. Relative, Absolute
c. absolute, relative
d. permanent, absolute
Ans: c. absolute, relative
12. Hema holds the title of chartered accountant. On a daily basis, she used to keep track of the
accounts on a spreadsheet. There are a number of steps that she must follow at all times. Can you
recommend a spreadsheet feature that will allow her to complete these activities quickly and without
having to repeat the processes each time?
a. Record Changes
b. Track Changes
c. Goal Seek
d. Using Macros
Ans: d. Using Macros
13. Raj has produced a worksheet in which he has entered all of his employees details. He wants
each employee to look over the spreadsheet and, if necessary, change their address and phone
number. He d also like to know what modifications his employees have made. Which aspect of the
spreadsheet should he enable so that he can view the changes that his staff have made?
a. Macro
b. Link Workbook
c. Change Worksheet
d. Track Changes
Ans: d. Track Changes
14. Sunita is working on a spreadsheet project. Her friend taught her how to rename a spreadsheet,
which will make it easier for her to identify the worksheet data. She was excited and told her brother
about it. A worksheet in spreadsheets can be renamed in ________different ways, according to her
brother.
a. 2
b. 3
c. 4
d. 1
Ans: b. 3
15. _________is a spreadsheet function that is designed to minimize or maximize a result based on a
set of rules that you describe.
a. Goal Seek
b. Scenario
c. Solver
d. Subtotal
Ans: c. Solver
16. The intersection point between a row and column is called _______.
a. Row
b. Column
c. Table
d. Cell
Ans: d. Cell
17. Formulas in a Spreadsheet must begin with a __________ sign.

a. $
b. @
c. #
d. =
Ans: d. =
18. ___________ is a tool to test what-if questions.

a. Scenario
b. Solver
c. Macro
d. Average
Ans: a. Scenario
19. Rohit received a 25 out of 30 grade in English and a 22 out of 30 grade in Math. In order to
calculate the score in IT, he needs to acquire an overall score of 85 percent. Provide him with the best
selection from the list below.
a. Macro
b. Solver
c. Goal Seek
d. Sub Total
Ans: c. Goal Seek
20. As a school project, Krish and Kritika conducted a survey of their neighborhood s literacy rates
by age, which they recorded in a spreadsheet. They both want to work on it at the same time to finish
it on time. Which option should they use to access the same Spreadsheet in order to save time?
a. Consolidate Worksheet
b. Shared Worksheet
c. Link Worksheet
d. Lock Worksheet
Ans: b. Shared Worksheet
21. You can use ________ to combine data from multiple worksheets into a master worksheet.
b. Goal Seek
c. Solver
d. Total data
22. The Consolidated option is available under _________ menu.

a. View
b. Tool
c. Insert
d. Data
Ans: d. Data
23. We can consolidate data by ________

a. Row Label
b. Column Label
c. Both of the above
Ans: c. Both of the above
24. In the consolidate window, which of the following functions are available?
a. Max
b. Min
c. Count
d. All of the above
25. Which option should we use to define the target range? (Where we want the result to be
displayed)
a. Source data range
b. Copy results to
c. Need result at
d. target range
Ans: b. Copy results to
26. Which option is used to name a range of cells?

a. Range name
b. Cell Range
c. Define Range
d. Select Range
Ans: c. Define Range
27. Define range option is available under the ________ menu.

a. Insert
b. View
c. Developer
d. Data
Ans: d. Data
28. SUBTOTALS _________ data arranged in an array (that is, a group of cells )
a. Add
b. Average
c. Find
d. Clear
Ans: a. Add
29. Subtotals are available in __________ menu.

a. Tools
b. Format
c. Insert
d. Data
Ans: d. Data
30. In Subtotals we can select up to _______ groups of arrays.

a. 3
b. 2
c. 4
d. Infinite
Ans: a. 3
31. Scenario option is available in ___________________ menu.

a. Data
b. Tools
c. Insert
d. Windows
Ans: b. Tools
32. We can shift from one scenario to another by _____________

a. Navigator
b. Find and Replace
c. Data Source
Ans:a. Navigator
33. Which option is suitable to calculate the effect of different interest rates on an investment.
a. Scenario
b. Subtotal
c. Consolidate
Ans: a. Scenario
34. Default name of first scenario created in Sheet1 of Calc is ________

a. Sheet1_Scenario1
b. Sheet1_Scenario_1
c. Sheet_1_Scenario1
d. Sheet_1_Scenario_1
Ans: b. Sheet1_Scenario_1
35. To select a random multiple cell hold down ________ key as you click on each cell.
a. Alt
b. Shift
c. Ctrl
d. All of the above
Ans: c. Ctrl
36. Goal Seek Option available in __ menu.

a. Tools
b. Format
c. Data
d. Insert
Ans: a. Tools
37. ____________ is a more elaborate form of Goal Seek.

a. Scenario
b. Subtotal
c. Solver
d. All of the above
Ans: c. Solver
38. Solver option is available under _________ menu

a. Tools
b. Format
c. Edit
d. Insert
Ans: a. Tools
39. Which feature of Calc helps to see the changes made in the shared worksheet?
a. Record Changes
b. Solver
c. Subtotal
Ans: a. Record Changes
40. Record Changes feature of Calc help

a. Authors and other reviewers to know which cells were edited.
b. to record the screen
c. to make changes permanent
Ans: a. Authors and other reviewers to know which cells were edited.
41. How can you consolidate data in SpreadSheet?

a. By Column Label
b. By Row Label
c. Both a) and b)
42. Subtotals refer to the process of _________ data arranged in an array (a group of cells).
a. finding
b. adding
c. clearing
d. averaging
Ans: b. adding
43. Is it true or false that when you print a spreadsheet, only the content of the active scenario is
printed?
a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
44. To select multiple random cells, what key should you hold down as you click on each cell?
a. Alt
b. Ctrl
c. Shift
d. All of the above
Ans: b. Ctrl
45. Can we link one worksheet to another worksheet?

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
46. Where are the sheet tabs located by default in a spreadsheet?

a. Top
b. Bottom
c. Middle
Ans: b. Bottom
47. What is the formula to refer to cell A3 in sheet named S1?

a. =S1.A3
b. = S1″.A3
c. =S1A3
Ans: a. =S1.A3
48. If you have two spreadsheets in the same folder linked to each other and you move the entire
folder to a new location, a relative hyperlink will:
a. may work
b. not work
c. work
Ans: c. work
49. How many options are shown on the left-hand side of the Hyperlink dialog box in Calc?
a. New Document
b. Internet
c. Document
d. All of the above
50. How can Suman and her friends work together in a spreadsheet?
a. By linking workbooks
b. By sharing a workbook
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: b. By sharing a workbook
51. What color border appears around a cell where changes were made in a shared worksheet?
a. Green
b. Red
c. Blue
d. Yellow
Ans: b. Red
52. What kind of colored bar marks a deleted column or row in a shared worksheet?
a. Line
b. Solid
c. Light
d. Heavy
Ans: d. Heavy
53. How can Calc find the changes made to a shared worksheet?
a. Comparing worksheets
b. Duplicating worksheets
c. Checking worksheets
Ans: a. Comparing worksheets
54. Where should one go to edit a macro in Calc?

a. View > Macros > Edit Macros
b. Format > Macros > Edit Macros
c. Tools > Macros > Edit Macros
Ans: c. Tools > Macros > Edit Macros
55. Which of the following modifications is not recorded in a shared worksheet?

a. Changes to any text
b. Cell formatting
c. Changes to any number
Ans: b. Cell formatting
56. In which menu is the Share Document option available?

a. Edit
b. File
c. Tools
d. View
Ans: c. Tools
57. How can we register a data source in OpenOffice.org?

a. Choose View > Options > OpenOffice.org Base > Databases
b. Choose Format > Databases > Options > OpenOffice.org Base
c. Choose Tools > Options > OpenOffice.org Base > Databases
Ans: c. Choose Tools > Options > OpenOffice.org Base -> Databases
58. Hyperlink option is available in which menu in Calc?

a. Insert
b. Edit
c. File
d. Format
Ans: a. Insert
59. When a new spreadsheet is opened, what is the default name of the first sheet?
a. Sheet1
b. Sheet 1
c. Sheet_1
Ans: a. Sheet1
60. Is the Comment in the Create Scenario dialog box optional?

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
61. Do each scenario in SpreadSheet have a name?

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
62. What option is used to give a name to a range of cells in SpreadSheet?

a. Define Range
b. Target name
c. Select Range
d. Cell Range
Ans: a. Define Range
63. Where can you find the Consolidate option in SpreadSheet?

a. Insert
b. View
c. Data
d. Tool
Ans: c. Data
64. What is the correct sequence to apply Subtotals?

a. Choose the data first, then launch the Subtotals window.
b. Open the Subtotals window first, and then choose the data to which subtotals should be applied.
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: a. Choose the data first, then launch the Subtotals window.
65. Which option is appropriate to determine how different interest rates will affect an investment?
a. Scenario
b. Consolidate
c. Subtotal
Ans: a. Scenario
66. In which menu is the Solver option available?

a. Edit
b. Format
c. Insert
d. Tools
Ans: d. Tools
67. What elements are present in the Insert Sheet dialog box?
a. After Current Sheet
b. No. of Sheets
c. Before Current Sheet
d. All of the above
68. How can hyperlinks in Calc be used?

a. to jump from one sheet to a website
b. to jump from one section to another section of the same sheet
c. to jump from one sheet to another sheet
d. All of the above
69. Where is the Hyperlink icon present in Calc?

a. Standard Toolbar
b. Format Toolbar
c. Menu Bar
Ans: a. Standard Toolbar
70. Can spreadsheet software allow users to share a workbook?

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
71. After sharing a worksheet, what word is displayed on the title bar after the worksheet s title?
a. Shared
b. Sharing Sheet
c. Sharing
Ans: a. Shared
72. How can users activate the Record Changes feature in a shared worksheet?
a. Edit > Changes > Record from the menu bar.
b. View > Changes > Record from the menu bar.
c. File > Changes > Record from the menu bar.
d. Insert > Changes > Record from the menu bar.
Ans: a. Edit > Changes > Record from the menu bar.
73. From which menu can worksheets be merged in Calc?

a. View
b. Tools
c. Edit
d. File
Ans: c. Edit
74. Which option should be used to start the macro recorder in Calc?
a. Tools > Record > Record Macro
b. Tools > Macros > Record Macro
c. Data > Macros > Record
Ans: b. Tools > Macros > Record Macro
75. What is the name of the library automatically included in a Calc document when it is created and
saved?
a. Macro Library
b. Standard
c. Module Library
Ans: b. Standard
76. Which of the following features are disabled in a shared spreadsheet?

a. Insert > Names
b. Insert > Comment
c. Edit > Changes, except for Merge Document
d. All of the above
77. In Calc, which menu can open the Share Document dialog box?
a. Edit
b. View
c. File
d. Tools
Ans: d. Tools
78. A relative hyperlink will stop working only if the target is moved.
a. True
b. False
Ans: b. False
79. How can an existing sheet be renamed in Calc?

a. Right click on existing sheet and then choose rename
b. Double click on one of the existing sheet
c. Both a) and b)
80. In which menu is the Goal Seek option available?

a. Insert
b. Tools
c. Data
d. Format
Ans: b. Tools
81. How many groups of arrays can you select in Subtotals?

a. 3
b. 4
c. 5
d. 6
Ans: a. 3
82. Which option allows you to specify where you want the result to be displayed when consolidating
data in SpreadSheet?
b. Target result at
c. Copy results to
d. Delete range
Ans: c. Copy results to
83. What feature allows you to collect data from different worksheets and combine it into a single
master worksheet?
a. Solver
b. Goal Seek
c. Data Consolidation
d. Total data
Ans: c. Data Consolidation
84. If you select this option, any values modified in the source range are automatically updated in the
target range in SpreadSheet.
a. Link to original data
b. Link to source data
c. Link to source range
d. Link to sheet data
Ans: b. Link to source data
85. In which menu can you find the Scenarios option in SpreadSheet?
a. Windows
b. Data
c. Insert
d. Tools
Ans: d. Tools
86. What is the default name of the first scenario created in Sheet1 of Calc?
a. Sheet_1_Scenario_1
b. Sheet1_Scenario1
d. Sheet1_Scenario_1
Ans: d. Sheet1_Scenario_1
87. Which menu is used to insert a new sheet in Calc?

a. Insert
b. Tool
c. Format
d. Edit
Ans: a. Insert
88. How many types of hyperlinks are shown on the left-hand side of the Hyperlink dialog box in
Calc?
a. 1
b. 2
c. 3
d. 4
Ans: d. 4
89. What feature in Calc allows users to view changes made in a shared worksheet?
a. Solver
b. Subtotal
c. Record Changes
Ans: c. Record Changes
90. How can users add a comment regarding any changes made in a shared worksheet?
a. File > Changes > Comments
b. View > Changes > Comments
c. Edit > Changes > Comments
Ans: c. Edit > Changes > Comments
91. What is the main purpose of using macros in Calc?

a. To simplify a task
b. To complicate a task
c. To do a task
d. To repeat a task
Ans: d. To repeat a task
92. Are function names in Calc case sensitive?

a. True
b. False
Ans: b. False
93. To compare an edited worksheet with the original worksheet, which option should be selected?
a. File > Compare Document
b. View > Compare Document
c. Tools > Compare Document
d. Edit > Compare Document
Ans: d. Edit > Compare Document
94. In Calc, where is the link to external data option present in the menu?
a. Insert
b. View
c. File
d. Edit
Ans: a. Insert
95. Can hyperlinks in Calc be either relative or absolute?

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
96. Which option is a more elaborate form of Goal Seek?

a. Subtotal
b. Solver
c. Scenario
d. All of the above
Ans: b. Solver

97. How can you shift from one scenario to another in SpreadSheet?
a. Navigator
b. Data Source
c. Find and Replace
Ans: a. Navigator
98. Is it true or false that you can only consolidate data from two sheets?
a. True
b. False
Ans: b. False
99. In which menu can you find the Subtotals option?

a. Data
b. Tools
c. Insert
d. Format
Ans: a. Data
100. Can we give different colors to different scenarios?

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
101. Can a new sheet be renamed in Calc?

a. While inserting a new sheet
b. After inserting a new sheet
c. Both a) and b)
102. Which functions can you use in the Consolidate window in SpreadSheet?
a. Count
b. Max
c. Min
d. All of the above
103. In which menu can you find the Define Range option in SpreadSheet?
a. Developer
b. View
c. Insert
d. Data
Ans: d. Data
104. Scenarios are a tool to test __________ questions.

a. if
b. what else
c. if else
d. what if
Ans: d. what if

105. Is it true or false that you can create only three scenarios for a given range of cells in
SpreadSheet?
a. True
b. False
Ans: b. False
106. Can we add/insert more sheets in a spreadsheet?

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
107. How many sheets are present in a spreadsheet by default?

a. 2
b. 3
c. 4
d. 5
Ans: b. 3
108. An absolute hyperlink will stop working only if the target is moved.
a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
109. Can we link a text in a spreadsheet to any web URL in Calc?

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
110. Can multiple users access a shared workbook simultaneously?

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
111. Once a spreadsheet is shared, can it be unshared?

a. True
b. False
Ans: b. False
112. What is the purpose of the Record Changes feature in Calc?

a. To record the screen.
b. To make changes permanent.
c. To allow authors and reviewers to know which cells were edited.
Ans: c. To allow authors and reviewers to know which cells were edited.
113. What is a saved sequence of commands or keystrokes in Calc called?

a. Solver
b. Macro
c. Autosum
d. Consolidate
Ans: b. Macro
114. What option should be clicked to stop the macro recorder in Calc?
a. End Recording
b. Close Recording
c. Stop Recording
Ans: c. Stop Recording
Q1. _________ allows you to gather data from different worksheets into a master worksheet.
b. Goal Seek
c. Solver
d. Total data
Q2. Consolidate option is available under _________ menu.

a. View
b. Tool
c. Insert
d. Data
Ans: d. Data
Q3. Data can be consolidated from two sheets only.(T/F)

a. True
b. False
Ans: b. False
Q4. We can consolidate data by ________

a. Row Label
b. Column Label
Q5. Which of the following functions are available in consolidate window?

a. Max
b. Min
c. Count
d. All of the above
Q6. In which option we have to specify the target range(Where we want the result to be displayed)
b. Copy results to
c. Need result at
d. target range
Ans: b. Copy results to
Q7. If you select ________ then any values modified in the source range are automatically updated in
the target range.
a. Link to source data
b. Link to sheet data
c. Link to original data
d. Link to source range
Ans: a. Link to source data
Q8. Which option is used to name a range of cells?

a. Range name
b. Cell Range
c. Define Range
d. Select Range
Ans: c. Define Range
Q9. Define range option is available under ________ menu.

a. Insert
b. View
c. Developer
d. Data
Ans: d. Data
Q10. The text in the row label or column label must be identical, otherwise, new row or column will
be inserted.(T/F)
a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
Q11. SUBTOTALS _________ data arranged in an array (that is, a group of cells )
a. Add
b. Average
c. Find
d. Clear
Ans: a. Add
Q12. Subtotals is available in __________ menu.

a. Tools
b. Format
c. Insert
d. Data
Ans: d. Data
Q13. In Subtotals we can select up to _______ groups of arrays.

a. 3
b. 2
c. 4
d. Infinite
Ans: a. 3
Q14. Identify the correct sequence

a. First open subtotals window and then select the data where we need to apply subtotals.
b. First Select data and then open subtotals window.
c. Both of the above are correct
Ans: b. First Select data and then open subtotals window.
Q15. Scenarios are tool to test _________ questions.

a. if else
b. what else
c. what if
d. if
Ans: c. what if
Q16. Each scenario has a name.(T/F)

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
Q17. Scenario option is available in ___________________ menu.

a. Data
b. Tools
c. Insert
d. Windows
Ans: b. Tools
Q18. When we print a spreadsheet, only content of active scenario is printed.(T/F)

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
Q19. We can shift from one scenario to another by _____________

a. Navigator
b. Find and Replace
c. Data Source
Ans: a. Navigator
Q20. We can create only 3 scenario for a given range of cells.(T/F)

a. True
b. False
Ans: b. False
Q21. Which option is suitable to calculate the effect of different interest rates on an investment.
a. Scenario
b. Subtotal
c. Consolidate
Ans: a. Scenario
Q22. Default name of first scenario created in Sheet1 of Calc is ________

a. Sheet1_Scenario1
b. Sheet1_Scenario_1
d. Sheet_1_Scenario_1
Ans: b. Sheet1_Scenario_1
Q23. To select random multiple cell hold down ________ key as you click on each cell.
a. Alt
b. Shift
c. Ctrl
d. All of the above
Ans: c. Ctrl
Q24. Goal Seek Option available in __ menu.

a. Tools
b. Format
c. Data
d. Insert
Ans: a. Tools
Q25. Comment in Create Scenario dialog box is Optional(T/F)

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
Q26. We can give different colors to different scenario?(T/F)

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
Q27. ____________ is more elaborate form of Goal Seek.

a. Scenario
b. Subtotal
c. Solver
d. All of the above
Ans: c. Solver
Q28. Solver option is available under _________ menu

a. Tools
b. Format
c. Edit
d. Insert
Ans: a. Tools
Q29. We can link one worksheet to another worksheet.(T/F)

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
Q30. We can not add/insert more sheets in a spreadsheet.(T/F)

a. True
b. False
Ans: b. False
Q31. When you open a new spreadsheet, by default it has sheet named ______________.
a. Sheet1
b. Sheet_1
c. Sheet 1
Ans: a. Sheet1
Q32. By default sheets tab are present at the _____________ of the spreadsheet.
a. Top
b. Bottom
Ans: b. Bottom
Q33. We can insert the new sheet in Calc by clicking on __ menu.

a. Format
b. Edit
c. Insert
d. Tool
Ans: c. Insert
Q34. Which of the following elements are present in Insert Sheet dialog box.
a. After Current Sheet
b. Before Current Sheet
c. No. of Sheets
d. All of the above
Q35. By default ________________ sheets are present in Spreadsheet.

a. 1
b. 2
c. 3
d. 4
Ans: c. 3
Q36. We can rename a new sheet in Calc.

a. After inserting a new sheet
b. While inserting a new sheet
Q 37. We can rename an existing sheet in Calc by

a. Double click on one of the existing sheet
b. Right click on existing sheet and then choose rename
Q 38. Formula to refer a cell A3 in sheet named S1 is

a. =S1A3
b. =S1.A3
c. = S1″.A3
Ans: b. =S1.A3
Q 39. Hyperlink in Calc can be used

a. to jump from one sheet to another sheet.
b. to jump from one sheet to website
c. to jump from one section to another section of same sheet
d. All of the above

Q 40. Hyperlink in Calc can be either relative or absolute.(T/F)
a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
Q 41. Absolute link will stop working only if the target is moved(T/F)
a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
Q 42. A relative link will stop working only if the target is moved.(T/F)
a. True
b. False
Ans: b. False
Q 43. If you have two spreadsheets in the same folder linked to each other and you move the entire
folder to a new location, a relative hyperlink will _____________
a. not work
b. work
c. may work
Ans: b. work
Q 44. Hyperlink option is available in ______ menu.

a. File
b. Edit
c. Format
d. Insert
Ans: d. Insert
Q 45. Hyperlink icon is present on _________________

a. Format Toolbar
b. Standard Toolbar
c. Menu Bar
d. None of the Above
Ans: b. Standard Toolbar
Q 46. Hyperlink dialog box shows ___________ types of hyperlinks on left hand side.
a. 1
b. 2
c. 3
d. 4
Ans: d. 4
Q 47. We can link a text in spreadsheet to any Web URL.(T/F)

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
Q 48. Hyperlink dialog box in Calc shows ________ options on left hand side.
a. Internet
b. Document
c. New Document
d. All of the above
Q 49. In Calc link to external data is present in _____________ menu.

a. File
b. Edit
c. Insert
d. View
Ans: c. Insert
Q 50. To register a data source in OpenOffice.org

a. Choose Tools -> Options -> OpenOffice.org Base -> Databases
b. Choose Tools -> Options -> Databases-> OpenOffice.org Base
c. Choose Tools -> Databases-> Options -> OpenOffice.org Base
Ans: a. Choose Tools -> Options -> OpenOffice.org Base -> Databases
Q 51. Spreadsheet software allows the user to share the workbook.(T/F)

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
Q 52. Several users can access shared workbook simultaneously.(T/F)

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
Q 53. Suman and her friends wants to work together in a spreadsheet. They can do so by
a. Sharing Workbook
b. Linking Workbook
Ans: a. Sharing Workbook
Q 54. In Calc Share Document dialog box can open by clicking on ______________ menu.
a. File
b. Edit
c. View
d. Tool
Ans: d. Tool
Q 55. We can not unshare a spreadsheet, once it is shared.(T/F)

a. True
b. False
Ans: b. False
Q 56. After sharing the worksheet, the word ___________ is then shown on the title bar after the
worksheet s title
a. Sharing
b. Shared
c. Sharing Sheet
Ans: b. Shared
Q 57. Share document option available in _____ menu
a. Tools
b. View
c. Edit
d. File
Ans: a. Tools
Q 58. The following features are known to be disabled in a shared spreadsheet

a. Edit > Changes, except for Merge Document
b. Insert > Names
c. Insert > Comment
d. All of the above
Q 59. Which of the following buttons are present on Resolve Conflict dialog box which appear
during saving shared worksheet.
a. Keep Mine
b. Keep Other
c. Keep All Mine
d. All of the above
Q 60. Any cells modified by the other user in shared worksheet are shown with a ________ border.
a. Blue
b. Green
c. Red
d. Yellow
Ans: c. Red
Q 61. Which feature of Calc help to see the changes made in the shared worksheet?
a. Record Changes
b. Solver
c. Subtotal
Ans: a. Record Changes
Q 62. To activate the record changes feature in shared worksheet ___________

a. Select File > Changes > Record from the menu bar.
b. Select Edit > Changes > Record from the menu bar.
c. Select View > Changes > Record from the menu bar.
d. Select Insert > Changes > Record from the menu bar.
Ans: b. Select Edit > Changes > Record from the menu bar.
Q 63. A __ colored border, appears around a cell where changes were made in shared worksheet.
a. Blue
b. Yellow
c. Green
d. Red
Ans: d. Red
Q 64. A deleted column or row in shared worksheet is marked by a ______________ colored bar.
a. Light
b. Line
c. Solid
d. Heavy
Ans: d. Heavy
Q 65. Record Changes feature of Calc help

a. Authors and other reviewers to know which cells were edited.
b. to record the screen
c. to make changes permanent
Ans: a. Authors and other reviewers to know which cells were edited.
Q 66. Which of the following changes are not recorded in shared worksheet?
a. Changes any number
b. Changes any text
c. Cell Formatting
Ans: c. Cell Formatting
Q 67. We can add a comment regarding any changes made in shared worksheet by
a. Edit > Changes > Comments
b. File > Changes > Comments
c. View > Changes > Comments
Ans: a. Edit > Changes > Comments
Q 68. After adding comment to a changed cell of shared worksheet, we can see it by hovering the
mouse pointer over the cell(T/F)
a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
Q 69. Anil is the author of shared worksheet so he has the right to accept or reject changes made by
the reviewers.(T/F)
a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
Q 70. Accept or Reject Changes dialog box (for shared worksheet) can be opened by clicking on
a. File > Changes > Accept or Reject.
b. Edit > Changes > Accept or Reject.
c. View > Changes > Accept or Reject.
Ans: b. Edit > Changes > Accept or Reject.
Q 71. Worksheets can be merged from ____________________ menu.

a. Edit
b. File
c. View
d. Tools
Ans: a. Edit

Q 72. When sharing worksheets authors may forget to record the changes they make. Calc can find
the changes by __________ worksheets
a. duplicating
b. comparing
c. checking
Ans: b. comparing
Q 73. Edited worksheet can be compared with the original worksheet by selecting.
a. File > Compare Document
b. Edit > Compare Document
c. View > Compare Document
d. Tools > Compare Document
Ans: b. Edit > Compare Document
Q 74. A _____________ is a saved sequence of commands or keystrokes that are stored for later use
a. Solver
b. Autosum
c. Consolidate
d. Macro
Ans: d. Macro
Q 75. Macros are especially useful to ___________ a task.

a. do
b. repeat
c. simplify
d. complicate
Ans: b. repeat
Q 76. Use ___________ Macro to start the macro recorder.

a. Tools > Macros > Record Macro
b. Tools > Record > Record Macro
c. Data > Macros > Record
Ans: a. Tools > Macros > Record Macro
Q 77. Click _____________ to stop the macro recorder

a. Close Recording
b. End Recording
c. Stop Recording
Ans: c. Stop Recording
Q 78. To edit macro, go to

a. Tools > Macros > Edit Macros
b. Edit > Macros > Edit Macros
c. View > Macros > Edit Macros
Ans: a. Tools > Macros > Edit Macros
Q 79. Function names in Calc are not case sensitive.(T/F)

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
Q 80. When a document is created and saved, it automatically contains a library named ___
a. Module Library
b. Macro Library
c. Standard
Ans: c. Standard
1. What is Consolidating data?

Answer The Data Consolidation tool summarises data from multiple worksheets or workbooks into
a single worksheet that you can simply update. Consolidate has a graphical interface for copying data
from one set of cells to another and then performing one of a dozen operations on it. Consolidation
allows the contents of cells from many sheets to be consolidated in one location.
2. What is Subtotal?
Answer SUBTOTAL: totals/adds data in an array that is, a collection of cells with column and/or
row labels. You can choose arrays and then apply a statistical function (sum, average, max, min) to
them using the Subtotals dialogue. To maximise efficiency, a function can be applied to up to three
sets of arrays.
3. What is Goal Seek?

Answer The word goal seeking refers to the act of determining your input value based on a
previously determined output value. The method entails the use of a certain operator in a formula that
may be calculated with computer software.
Example: Set Cell: This specifies the cell whose value will be changed to the desired value after the
Goal Seek operation is completed.
For instance, Jack received a 25 out of 30 in English and a 22 out of 30 in Math. In order to calculate
the score in IT, he needs to acquire an overall score of 85 percent. As a result, a goal has been
established, and according to it, Jack will discover one unknown variable, IT marks.
4. What is Scenario?
Answer Scenarios are a tool to test what-if questions. Each scenario is given a unique name and
can be changed and presented independently. Only the content of the currently active scenario is
printed when you print the spreadsheet. A scenario is essentially a set of saved cell values that you
may use in your calculations. Using the Navigator or a dropdown list displayed beside the changing
cells, you may simply switch between these sets.
5. What is Solver?
Answer The Solver option in the Tools menu is essentially a more advanced version of Goal Seek.
The Solver, on the other hand, deals with equations involving several unknown variables. It is meant
to minimise or maximise the result based on a set of rules that you specify.
6. Differentiate between relative and absolute hyperlinks.

Answer An absolute hyperlink will stop working only if the target is moved. A relative hyperlink
will stop working only if the source and target locations change relative to each other.
Suppose, if you have two spreadsheets in the same folder linked to each other and you move the
entire folder to a new location, a relative hyperlink will not break a link.
7. How can we rename a worksheet in Spreadsheet?

Answer There are three ways you can rename a worksheet, and the only difference between them is
the way in which you start the renaming process. You can do any of the following: Double-click on
one of the existing worksheet names. Right-click on an existing worksheet name, then choose
Rename from the resulting Context menu. Select the worksheet you want to rename (click on the
worksheet tab) and then select the Sheet option from the Format menu. This displays a submenu from
which you should select the Rename option.
8. How can we rename a worksheet in Spreadsheet?

Answer You can rename a worksheet in three different ways, with the only difference being how
you begin the renaming process. You can choose from the following options:
Select one of the existing worksheet names with a double-click.
Right-click an existing worksheet name, then select Rename from the Context menu that appears.
Select the worksheet you want to rename (by clicking on the worksheet tab), then choose Sheet from
the Format menu. This brings up a submenu, from which you should choose Rename.
8. What is the advantage of sharing worksheet data?

Answer
Enhance the speed of data entering
To facilitate collaboration, make things easy.
9. Explain features and use of Record changes.

Answer Calc offers a feature that allows you to keep track of what data was modified, when it was
updated, who performed the modification, and which cell it happened in.
A coloured border appears around a cell where changes were made, with a dot in the upper left-hand
corner. Other reviewers will easily notice which cells have been changed. A strong coloured bar
indicates a deleted column or row.
10. What is the purpose of adding comments?

Answer Comments from reviewers and authors can be added to explain their changes.
11. How can we add comments to the changes made?
Answer To add a remark to a modification, use the following syntax:
Make the necessary changes to the spreadsheet.
2. Select the cell that has been changed.
3. Select Edit > Changes > Comments from the drop-down menu. The following dialogue box
appears. Calc s automatically added comment displays in the title bar of this dialogue and is not
editable.
4. Click OK after typing your own comment.
12. Explain features of accepting or rejecting changes.

Answer The beauty of the recording changes mechanism becomes apparent when you receive a
worksheet with changes. You can now go through each change like the original author and decide
how to proceed. To get started, do the following:
1. Open the worksheet that has been changed.
2. Select Edit > Changes > Accept or Reject from the drop-down menu. The dialogue box displayed
below will appear.
3. Calc goes through each modification one by one. As you go through the process, you can accept or
reject each adjustment. If you wish to, you can also pick Accept all and reject all.
13. What are Macros? How can we record a Macro?

Answer When the same set of operations must be completed repeatedly, such as formatting or
applying a similar formula to a similar piece of data, macros can save time. It can be used to name
and track a sequence of events.
To record a macro, follow these steps:
1. Input data
2. Before performing any operation, go to tools->macro->record macro.
3. Now repeat the motion you just did.
4. Select Stop Recording from the drop-down menu. Now save the macro by giving it a name.
Define and Explain the usage of the following terms with Reference to OpenOffice Calc.
(a) Consolidating data (b) Subtotals (c) Goal seek (d) Scenario (e) Solver
Answer:
(a) Consolidating data
Data Consolidation allows you to gather together your data from separate worksheets into a master
worksheet.
OR
The Data Consolidation function takes data from a series of worksheets or workbooks and
summarizes it into a single worksheet that you can update easily. Consolidate provides a graphical
interface for copying data from one range of cells to another, then running one of a dozen functions
on the data. During consolidation, the contents of cells from several sheets can be combined in one
place.
(b) Subtotals
SUBTOTAL: totals/add data arranged in an array that is, a group of cells with labels for columns
and/or rows. Using the Subtotals dialog, you can select arrays, and then choose a statistical function
(sum, average, max, min) to apply to them. . For efficiency, one must choose up to three groups of
arrays to which to apply a function.
( c) Goal seek
Using the Goal Seek option under the Tools menu, you can discover what values will produce the
result that you want.
OR
Goal seeking is a general term used to describe the process involved in figuring out your input value
based on an already known output value. The process involves using a specific operator in a formula,
which can be calculated using computer software.
Example: Set Cell: It specifies the cell whose value will be changed to the desired value after the
result of the Goal Seek operation.
Example: Jack scored 25 out of 30 in English, 22 out of 30 in Maths. He wants to calculate the score
in IT he needs to achieve 85 percent in aggregate. So here goal is set and according to it Jack will find
one unknown variable IT marks.
(d) Scenario
Scenarios are a tool to test what-if questions. Each scenario is named, and can be edited and
formatted separately. When you print the spreadsheet, only the content of the currently active
scenario is printed. A scenario is essentially a saved set of cell values for your calculations. You can
easily switch between these sets using the Navigator or a drop-down list which can be shown beside
the changing cells.
For example, if you wanted to calculate the effect of different interest rates on an investment, you
could add a scenario for each interest rate, and quickly view the results. Formulas that rely on the
values changed by your scenario are updated when the scenario is opened. If all your sources of
income used scenarios, you could efficiently build a complex model of your possible income.
(e) Solver
The solver option under the Tools menu amounts to a more elaborate form of Goal Seek. The
difference is that the Solver deals with equations with multiple unknown variables. It is specifically
designed to minimize or maximize the result according to a set of rules that you define.
Each of these rules sets up whether an argument in the formula should be greater than, lesser than, or
equal to the value you enter.
For example, you can set the constraint that one of the variables or cells must not be bigger than
another variable, or no bigger than a given value. You can also define the constraint that one or more
variables must be integers (values without decimals), or binary values (where only 0 and 1 are
allowed). Once you have finished setting up the rules, you can adjust the argument and the results by
clicking the Solve button.
Explain how to create a reference to (a) Other worksheets within the same workbook (b)
worksheet of another workbook with keyboard and mouse.
OR
What are the two ways of referencing cells in other worksheets?
Answer:
a) Other worksheets within the same workbook
1. Click on the = icon next to the formula bar.
2. Now, click on the sheet tab for the sheet containing the cell to be referenced. (eg. Sheet2)
3. Click on cell F3 (where the balance is) in sheet2. The phrase Sheet2 .F3 should appear in the
formula bar. With the help of a keyboard, you have to type down the above formula in the formula
bar.
b) Worksheet of another workbook
Mouse:
1. Click the = icon next to the formula bar.
2. Switch to the other spreadsheet (the process to do this will vary depending on which
operating system you are using).
3. Select the sheet (Savings account or any) and then the reference cell (F3).
Keyboard:
Creating The Reference With The Keyboard
Referencing within the

Spreadsheet!
Typing the reference is simple once you know the format the reference takes. Thereference has three
parts to it:
 Path and file name
 Sheet name
 Cell
Looking at the figure above, you can see the general format for the reference is
= file:///Path &File Name #$SheetName.cell name.
Differentiate between relative and absolute hyperlinks.

Answer:
An absolute hyperlink will stop working only if the target is moved. A relative hyperlink will stop
working only if the source and target locations change relative to each other. Suppose, if you have
two spreadsheets in the same folder linked to each other and you move the entire folder to a new
location, a relative hyperlink will not break a link.
How can we rename a worksheet in Spreadsheet?

Answer:

There are three ways you can rename a worksheet, and the only difference between them is the way
in which you start the renaming process. You can do any of the following:
 Double-click on one of the existing worksheet names.
 Right-click on an existing worksheet name, then choose Rename from the resulting
Context menu.
 Select the worksheet you want to rename (click on the worksheet tab) and then select
the Sheet option from the Format menu. This displays a submenu from which you
should select the Rename option.
What is the advantage of sharing worksheet data?

Answer:
 Speed up data entry
 Make things easier for collaboration purposes.
Explain features and use of Record changes.

Answer:
Calc has the feature to track what data was changed when the change was made, who made the
change, and in which cell the change has occurred.
A colored border, with a dot in the upper left-hand corner, appears around a cell where changes were
made. Other reviewers then quickly know which cells were edited. A deleted column or row is
marked by a heavy-colored bar.
Example: If you are the sponsor of a youth baseball team. The coach has submitted a budget to you
for the season and you need to edit the costs and return them to her. You are concerned that if you just
make the changes, then the coach won t see the changes you made. You decide to use Calc with the
record changes feature turned on so that the coach can easily see the changes you have made.
What is the purpose of adding comments?

Answer:
Reviewers and authors can add their comments to explain their changes.
How can we add comments to the changes made?

Answer:
To add a comment to a change:
1. Make the change to the spreadsheet.
2. Select the cell with the change.
3. Choose Edit > Changes > Comments. The dialog shown below appears. The automatically-added
comment provided by Calc appears in the title bar of this dialog and cannot be edited. 4. Type your
own comment and click OK.
Explain the feature of accepting or reject changes.

Answer:
When you receive a worksheet back with changes, the beauty of the recording changes system
becomes evident. Now, as the original author, you can step through each change and decide how to
proceed. To begin this process:
1. Open the edited worksheet.
2. Select Edit > Changes > Accept or Reject. The dialog shown below opens.
3. Calc steps through the changes one at a time. You can choose to accept or reject each change as
you go through it. or you can also select Accept all and reject all if you want to do so.
What are Macros? How can we record a Macro?

Answer:

Macros help in saving time in cases when the same set of tasks are to be done repeatedly like
formatting or applying a similar formula in a similar range of data. It can be used to name and record
a set of actions.
Procedure to record a macro:
1. input data
2. before you do any action click on tools->macro->record macro
3. now perform the action you want to repeat
4. click on stop recording. now save macro by giving name to macro
Q1. How can we rename a worksheet?

Ans. There are three ways you can rename a worksheet
a. Double-click on one of the existing worksheet names.
b. Right-click on an existing worksheet name, then choose Rename from the resulting Context menu.
c. Select the worksheet you want to rename (click on the worksheet tab) and then select the Sheet
option from the Format menu. This displays a submenu from which you should select the Rename
option.
Q2. What are the two ways of referencing cells in other worksheets?
Ans. Two ways to reference cells in other sheets: by entering the formula directly using the keyboard
or by using the mouse.
Q3. Differentiate between Relative and absolute hyperlinks.

Ans. Hyperlinks can be used in Calc to jump to a different location from within a spreadsheet. An
absolute link will stop working only if the target is moved. A relative link will stop working only if
the start and target locations change relative to each other. For instance, if you have two spreadsheets
in the same folder linked to each other and you move the entire folder to a new location, a relative
hyperlink will not break.
Q4. List the procedure involved in Linking HTML Tables to Calc Worksheet.
Ans. You can insert tables from HTML documents, and data located within named ranges from an
OpenOffice.org Calc or Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, into a Calc spreadsheet.
We can do this in two ways: using the External Data dialog or using the Navigator.
Using the External Data dialog
a. Open the Calc worksheet where the external data is to be inserted. This is the target worksheet.
b. Select the cell where the external data is to be inserted.
c. Choose Insert -> Link to External Data.
d. On the External Data dialog, type the URL of the source worksheet or click the [ ] button to open
a file selection dialog. Press Enter to get Calc to load the list of available tables.
e. In the Available tables/range list, select the named ranges or tables you want to insert. You can also
specify that the ranges or tables are updated every (number of) seconds.
f. Click OK to close this dialog and insert the linked data.
Q5. What is the purpose of adding comments?

Ans. Comments are mostly used in shared Calc sheet which is used to explain the changes made in
the sheet to the author of the sheet.
Q6. How can we add comments to the changes made?

Ans. Comments can be added as follows:
1. Make the change to the spreadsheet.
2. Select the cell with the change.

3. Choose Edit > Changes > Comments. The automatically-added comment provided by Calc appears
in the title bar of this dialog and cannot be edited.
4. Type your own comment and click OK.
After you have added a comment to a changed cell, you can see it by hovering the mouse pointer over
the cell.
Q7. What are Macros?

Ans. A macro is a saved sequence of commands or keystrokes that are stored for later use. Macros are
especially useful to repeat a task the same way over and over again.
Q8. How can we record a Macro?

Ans. Steps to record macro are as follows
a. Use Tools > Macros > Record Macro to start the macro recorder. The Record Macro dialog is
displayed with a stop recording button.
b. Perform the actions you want to be recorded in the document.
c. Click Stop Recording.
d. The Macro dialog appears, in which you can save and run the macro.
Fill in the blanks (Electronic Spreadsheet (Advanced))

1. At the bottom of each worksheet window is a small tab that indicates the name of the worksheets
in the workbook.
2. A cell reference refers to a cell or a range of cells on a worksheet and can be used to find the
values or data that you want formula to calculate.
3. Spreadsheet software allows the user to share the workbook and place it in the Network location
where several users can access.
4. Spreadsheet software can find the changes by Comparing Sheets.
5. Macros are useful to repeat a task the same way over and over again.

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
REVISION NOTES
A database is an organized collection of data. It is considered as a container of information. In the

manual system, you would maintain several files with different bits of information while in the
computerized system you would use database programs such as Microsoft Access, OpenOffice.org
Base, and MySQL, to organize the data as per your business need.
A database is basically a computerbased record/data/information keeping system. Data is raw,

unorganised facts and entities relevant to the user need to be processed such as a digital representation
of text, numbers, graphical images or sound. The data are stored in such a way that, they are
independent of the programs used by the people for accessing the data.
Database can be created with the help of following structures
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (DBMS):

DBMS is a collection of programs that enables users to create, maintain database and control all the
access to the database. It is a computer based record keeping system.
The primary goal of the DBMS is to provide an environment that is convenient and efficient for user
to retrieve and store information. It acts as an interface between the application program and the data
stored in the database.
DBMS is a software package that manages database. e.g. MySQL, INGRES, MS-Access, etc.
DBMS is actually a tool that is used to perform any kind of operation on data in database. It also
maintains data consistency in case of multiple users. The purpose of a DBMS is to bridge the gap
between information and data.
Data can be organized into two types:

 Flat File: Data is stored in a single table. Usually suitable for less amount of data.
 Relational: Data is stored in multiple tables and the tables are linked using a common field.
Relational is suitable for medium to large amount of data.
DATABASE SERVERS
Database servers are dedicated computers that hold the actual databases and run only the DBMS and
related software.
ADVANTAGES OF A DATABASE/DBMS
The centralised nature of database system provides several advantages, which overcome the
limitations of the conventional file processing system. These advantages are as follows
1. Reduce Data Redundancy: Redundancy means duplication of data . This eliminates the
replication of data item in different files, extra processing required to face the data item from a
large database. This also ensures data consistency and saves the storage space.
2. Enforcing Data Integrity: It means that, the data contained in the database is accurate and
consistent. Integrity constraints or consistency rules can be applied to database, so that the correct
data can be entered into the database.
3. Data Sharing: The data stored in the database can be shared among multiple users or application
programs.

4. Data Security: The DBMS ensures that the access of database is done only through an authorised
user.
5. Ease of Application Development: The application programmer needs to develop the application
programs according to the user s needs.
6. Backup and Recovery: The DBMS provides backup and recovery sub-system that is responsible
to recover data from hardware and software failures.
7. Multiple Views of Data: A view may be the subset of database. Various users may have different
views of the database itself.
8. Enforced Standards: It can ensure that, all the data follow the applicable standards.
9. Data Independence: System data descriptions are independent from the application programs.
DISADVANTAGES OF A DATABASE/DBMS
There are many advantages of database, but database also have some minor disadvantages. These
disadvantages are as follows
1. Cost of Hardware and Software: Through the use of a database system, new costs are generated
due to additional hardware and software requirements.
2. Complexity: A database system creates additional complexity and requirements.
3. Database Failures: If database is corrupted due to power failure or it is corrupted on the storage
media, then our valuable data may be lost or the system will stop working.
4. Lower Efficiency: A database system is a multi-user software, which is less efficient.
SOME KEY FEATURES OF A DATABASE:

1. A database can have one or many tables. An address book example is a very simple one, in real
world there are many more details involved.
2. Each table in a database contains information about one type of item. So, a database is a container
that holds tables and other objects and manages how they can be used.
3. A record uniqueness in every table. It is important to be able to distinguish between different
items having duplicate values. Uniqueness helps to avoid accidental duplication of records caused
by user or computer error.
4. Every database table should have one or more fields designated as key. You can assign a unique
value to this key for differentiating records that may have similar names or addresses.
COMPONENTS OF A DATABASE
A database consists of several components. Each component plays an important role in the database
system environment.
The major components of database are as follows
 Data: It is raw numbers, characters or facts represented by value. Most of the organisations
generate, store and process large amount of data. The data acts as a bridge between the hardware
and the software. Data may be of different types such as User data, Metadata and Application
Metadata.
 Software: It is a set of programs that lies between the stored data and the users of database. It is
used to control and manage the overall computerised database. It uses different types of software
such as MySQL, Oracle, etc.
 Hardware: It is the physical aspect of computer, telecommunication and database, which consists
of the secondary storage devices such as magnetic discs, optical discs, etc., on which data is
stored.
 Users: It is the person, who needs information from the database to carry out its primary business
responsibilities.
TYPES OF USERS
The various types of users which can access the database system are as follows

 Database Administrator (DBA): A person, who is responsible for managing or establishing
policies for the maintenance and handling the overall database management system is called
DBA.
 Application Programmer: A person, who writes application programs in programming
languages to interact and manipulate the database are called application programmer.
 End-user: A person, who interacts with the database system to perform different operations on
the database like inserting, deleting, etc., through menus or forms is called end-user.
RELATIONAL DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (RDBMS)

RDBMS is a type of DBMS that stores data in the form of relations (tables). Relational databases are
powerful, so they require few assumptions about how data is related or how it will be extracted from
the databases.
An important feature of relational database system is that a single database can be spread across
several tables. Base, Oracle, DB2, SAP, Sybase, ASE, Informix, Access, etc., are the examples of
RDBMS.
WORKING OF A DATABASE
Database is created to operate large quantities of information by input, store, retrieve and manage the
information. It is a centralised location which provides an easy way to access the data by several
users. It does not keep the separate copies of a particular data file still a number of users can access
the same data at the same time.
As the diagram shows, DBMS works as an interface between the user and the centralised database.
First, a request or a query is forwarded to a DBMS which works (i.e. a searching process is started on
the centralised database) on the received query with the available data and if the result is obtained, it
is forwarded to the user.
If the output does not completely fulfill the requirements of the user, then a rollback (again search) is
done and again search process is performed until the desired output is obtained.
DATA INTEGRITY
Data Integrity ensures the accuracy, reliability and consistency of the data during any operation.
Each type of data integrity are as follows
 Entity Integrity: It defines the primary key of a table. Entity integrity rule on a column does not
allow duplicate and null values.
 Domain Integrity: It defines the type, range and format of data allowed in a column. Domain
integrity states that all values in a column must be of same type.
 Referential Integrity: It defines the foreign key concepts. Referential integrity ensures that data
in related tables remains accurate and consistent before and after changes.
 User Defined Integrity: If there is some business requirements which do not fit any above data
integrity then user can create own integrity, which is called user defined integrity.

KEY FIELDS
The key is defined as the column or the set of columns of the database table which is used to identify
each record uniquely in a relation. If a table has id, name and address as the column names, then each
one is known as the key for that table. The key field is a unique identifier for each record.
TYPES OF KEY FIELDS

The following are the types of key fields available in the DBMS system
Primary Key: A field or a set of fields that uniquely identify each record in a table is known as a
primary key. Each relation has atleast one column for which each row that must have a unique value.
Only one column attribute can be defined as a primary key for each table.
A primary key must possess the following properties
 It does not allow null values.
 It has a unique index.
 It allows numbers and text both.
e.g. In the student s table, StudentId works as a primary key because it contains Ids which are unique
for each student. Note: Data cannot be primary key.
Candidate Key: The set of all attributes which can uniquely identify each tuple of a relation are
known as candidate keys. Each table may have one or more candidate keys and one of them will
become the primary key. The candidate key of a relation is always a minimal key. e.g. Column
StudentId and the combination of FirstName and LastName work as the candidate keys for the
student table.
A candidate key must possess the following properties
 For each row, the value of the key must uniquely identify that row.
 No attribute in the key can be discarded without destroying the property of unique
identification.
Alternate Key: From the set of candidate keys after selecting one of the keys as a primary key, all
other remaining keys are known as alternate keys. e.g. From the candidate keys (StudentId,
combination of FirstName and LastName), if StudentId is chosen as a primary key, then the
combination of FirstName and LastName columns work as alternate keys.
Foreign Key: A field of a table (relation) that references the primary key of another table is referred
to as foreign key. The relationship between two tables is established with the help of foreign key. A
table may have multiple foreign keys and each foreign key can have a different referenced table.
Foreign keys play an essential role in database design, when tables are broken apart, then foreign keys
make it possible for them to be reconstructed. e.g. CourseId column of student table (reference table)
works as a foreign key as well as a primary key for course table (referenced table).
Data in a relational database management system (RDBMS) is organized in the form of tables.
DATABASE OBJECTS :
1) Table: A table is a set of data elements (values) that is organized using a model of vertical
columns and horizontal rows. A table has a defined number of columns, but can have any number
of rows. Each row is identified by the values appearing in a particular column identified as a
unique key index or the key field.
2) Columns or Fields or Attributes: A column is a set of data values of a particular simple type,
one for each row of the table. The columns provide the structure according to which the rows are
composed. For example, cFirstName, or cLastName are fields in a row.
3) Rows or Records or Tuples: A row also called a Record or Tuple represents a single data item in
a table. Each row in a table represents a set of related data, and every row in the table has the
same structure.

CREATING DATABASE USING OPENOFFICE:
1) Open the OpenOffice Base Application by Clicking on Start>Programs>OpenOffice.org
4>OpenOffice.org Base.
2) Create a new database by selecting the option Create a new database
3) Database wizard appear. Click Finish. The Save As dialog box appears.
4) Specify a name for the database in the File name: field and click Save.
CREATE TABLES:
Tables are the basic building blocks of a database. You store the data in the database in the form of
tables.
There are different ways to create a table:
a) Use Wizard To Create Table:

The following are the steps to create a table:
1) Click on Tables > Use Wizard to Create Table
2) Click the Select Fields > Choose Category > Select the table > Click on Next Button.
3) Select the fields as per the requirements. Click on Next button
4) Set the data types and properties of the selected fields. Click on Next Button
5) Set the Primary Key and Click on Next Button
6) Window to rename the table will open. A user can either go ahead with the same table name or
can change it.
7) Click on Finish to insert the data in the table.
b) Creating table using Design View

1) Click on Create Table in Design View.
2) Specify the field name and data type of the field.
3) Save the table by clicking on File > Save
4) Specify the table name. The default name is Table1. Click OK.
5) An alert appears, if there is no primary key in the table.
6) Click yes and set the primary key and finally save the table.
DATA TYPES:
Datatypes are used to identify which type of data (value) we are going to store in the database. Data
types in OpenOffice base are broadly classified into five categories listed below.
 Numeric Types
 Alphanumeric Types
 Binary Types
 Date time
 Other Variable types
Numeric Types: Numeric data types in a database can be used for storing information such as mobile
number, roll number, door number etc. The different types of numeric data types available are listed
here.

Alphanumeric Types: This data type is used to store information which has alphabets as well as
numbers for example address, book summary field etc. The different types of Alphanumeric Types
available are listed here.
Binary Types: Binary data types are used for storing data in binary formats. Binary data types in a
database can be using for storing photos, music files, etc.
Date time: Date time data types in a database can be used for storing information such as date of
birth, date of admission, date of product sale, etc.

OTHER DATA TYPES:
PERFORM OPERATIONS ON TABLE

In OpenOffice Base, data is stored in tables which can be inserted, modified and removed using
appropriate options.
Inserting Data In The Table:

To insert the data in the table, follow the steps:
1) Select the table > Double click on it.
2) The table will open in Datasheet View.
3) Insert the required number of records in Datasheet View.
Editing Records In The Table:

To edit the data in the table, follow the steps:
3) Edit the required record in Datasheet View.
Deleting Records From The Table:

To remove the data from the table, follow the steps:
3) Select the data > right click on selected data > select the Delete option
FIELD PROPERTIES:
To set the field properties: Select the table > Right click > Select the option Edit > the table will open
in Design View.
In design view there are different properties of fields according to the data type set for each field.
The properties of numeric type data is given below :

1) AutoValue if set to yes then field will get the auto numeric values.
2) AutoValue if set to yes then field will get the auto numeric values.
3) Length By default length of the field is 10 but the size of the field can be set to maximum
length.
4) Default Value A default value can be set for a field if user don t provide any value while
entering the values in the table.
5) Format This property helps to set the format of the data entered in the field such as 91-222-333.
The properties of character type data is shown below :

1) Entry Required if set to yes then it will be must to insert the value in the field.
2) Length By default length of the field is 10 but the size of the field can be set to maximum length.
3) Default Value A default value can be set for a field if user don t provide any value while
entering the values in the table.
4) Format This property helps to set the format of the data entered in the field such as 91-222-333.
SORTING DATA: Sorting means to arrange the data in either ascending order of descending order.
REFERENTIAL INTEGRITY:
Referential integrity is used to maintain accuracy and consistency of data in a relationship. In Base,
data can be linked between two or more tables with the help of primary key and foreign key
Referential integrity helps to avoid:
1) Adding records to a related table if there is no associated record available in the primary key table.
2) Changing values in a primary if any dependent records are present in associated table(s).
3) Deleting records from a primary key table if there are any matching related records available in
associated table(s).
CREATING AND EDITING RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN TABLES:

A relationship refers to an association or connection between two or more tables. Relationships
between tables helps to:
 Save time as there is no need to enter the same data in separate tables.
 Reduce data-entry errors.
 Summarize data from related tables.
You can create a relationship between any two tables by selecting Relationships option from the
Tools menu.
There are three types of relationships which can be created in tables:
1) ONE to ONE Relationship: In this relationship, both the tables must have primary key columns.
2) One to Many Relationship: In this relationship, one of the table must have primary key column.
3) Many to Many Relationship: In this relationship, no table has the primary key column.
REMOVE THE RELATIONSHIPS:

The relationships applied on the tables can be removed also with the help of Delete option. Right
Click on the relationship thread and select Delete option.
RETRIEVE DATA USING QUERY

A query is to collect specific information from the pool of data. A query helps us join information
from different tables and filter that information
OR
Queries are commands that are used to define the data structure and also to manipulate the data in the
database.
There are two types of languages:-

DDL (Data Definition Language)
DML (Data Manipulation Language)
DATA DEFINITION LANGUAGE (DDL)

DDL is used to define the structure of your tables and other objects in the database. In DBMS, it is
used to specify a database schema as a set of definitions (expressed in DDL). In SQL, the Data
Definition Language allows you to create, alter and destroy database objects. Basically, a data
definition language is a computer language used to create and modify the structure of database
objects in a database. These database objects include views, schemes, tables, indexes, etc.
This term is also known as data description language in some contexts, as it describes the fields and
records in a database table.
Data definition language consists of various commands that lets you to perform some specified tasks
as follows
1) CREATE: Uses to create objects in the database.
2) ALTER: Uses to alter the structure of the database table. This command can add up additional
columns, drop existing columns and even change the data type of columns involved in a database
table.
3) DROP: Uses to delete objects from the database.
4) TRUNCATE: Uses to remove all records from a table.
5) RENAME: Uses to rename an object.
DATA MANIPULATION LANGUAGE (DML)

DML provides various commands used to access and manipulate data in existing database. This
manipulation involves inserting data into database tables, retrieving existing data, deleting data from
existing tables and modifying existing data.
DML is mostly incorporated in SQL database. The basic goal of DML is to provide efficient human
interaction with the system.
The DMLs are of two types
Procedural DMLs These require a user to specify what data is needed and how to get it.
Non-Procedural DMLs These require a user to specify what data is needed without specifying how to
get it.
Various data manipulation language commands are as follows
1) SELECT: Used to retrieve data from a database.
2) INSERT: Used to insert data into a table.
3) UPDATE: Used to update existing data within a table.
4) DELETE: Used to delete all records from a table, the space of the records remains.
5) LOCK TABLE: Used to control concurrency.
SELECT STATEMENT :
A SELECT statement retrieves zero or more rows from one or more tables. SELECT is the most
commonly used Data Manipulation Language(DML) command. To retrieve all the columns in a table
the syntax is: SELECT * FROM <Table Name>;
For example, if you want to display all the data from table emp (short form of employee), the
command is
Select * from emp;
The SELECT statement has many optional clauses:

 WHERE specifies which rows to retrieve.
 ORDER BY specifies an order in which to return the rows.
for example : Select * from emp where name = Ravi ;
The above query will show result of a particular employee named Ravi .
Select * from emp order by Salary;
The above query will show all the records of table emp according to ascending order of column
Salary.
PERFORMING CALCULATIONS :
In Base, simple calculations can be done on the data using arithmetic operators. Example:
1) To display the salary of all the employees after incrementing by 1000 then the following SQL
command will be executed in Base. (Fields of table Employee are EmployeeID, FirstName, Salary)
Select EmployeeID , FirstName , Salary +1000 from Employee ;

2) To display the salary of all the employees after decreasing by 10000 then the SQL command will
be:
Select EmployeeID , FirstName , Salary 10000 from Employee ;
3) To display the salary of all the employees after incrementing it as twice the amount of present
salary, then the SQL command will be .
Select EmployeeID , FirstName , Salary * 2 from Employee
UPDATE STATEMENT :
Update statement is used for modifying records in a database. The general syntax of the update
statement is as follows:
UPDATE <table name> SET <Column name > = value [WHERE <Condition>];
for example :
1) To increase(update) the salary of employee Ravi by Rs 2000 (in table Employee)then the SQL
command will be:
Update Employee set Salary = Salary + 2000 Where FirstName = Ravi ;
CREATE FORMS AND REPORTS USING WIZARD

FORM: A form provides the user a systematic way of storing information into the database. It is an
interface in a user specified layout that lets users to view, enter, and change data directly in database
objects such as tables.
Creating Form Using Wizard : Steps To Create Form Using Wizard are :
1) Click Use Wizard to Create Form option under Tasks group. The Form Wizard dialog box
appears.
2) Select selective fields to be sent onto the form by selecting the field name and clicking >button
and click Next.
3) Select the option Add Subform if you need to insert the contents in the table in a separate form
and click Next.
4) Arrange selected fields in a form and click Next.
5) Select the data entry mode and click Next.
6) Specify the styles to be used in the form and click Next.
7) Specify the name of the form. Click Finish.
REPORT: A report helps to display the data in a summarized manner. It is used to generate the
overall work outcome in a clear format.
Creating Reports using wizard : Steps To Create Report Using Wizard are :
1) Click on Use Wizard to Create Report option available under Tasks.
2) Select all the table fields by selecting the >> button.
3) Redefine the label of the fields in the reports or else you can set the default name and click Next.
4) Define grouping for the fields of the table if required and click Next
5) Sort the field in the report by selecting the appropriate field name and sorting method(if required)
and click Next.
6) Select the layout of the report and click Next.
7) Define a name for the report and click Finish.

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. Fill in the Blanks

1. A database is an organized collection of data.
2. A DBMS is a software package that can be used for creating and managing databases.
3. A RDBMS is a database management system that is based on the relational model.
4. Three popular DBMS software are Microsoft Access, OpenOfficeBase & MySQL.
5. A Primary Key is a unique value that identifies a row in a table.
6. Composite Key is a combination of one or more columns.
7. A table is a set of data elements that is organized using a model of vertical columns and
horizontal rows.
8. A column is a set of data values of a particular type, one for each row of the table.
9. A row represents a single, data item in a table.
10. Datatypes are used to identify which type of data we are going to store in the database.
11. Create table DDL command is used to create a table.
12. Common DDL statements are create, alter and drop.
13. The types of languages used for creating and manipulating the data in the Database are DDL &
DML.
14. A DDL is a standard for commands that define the different structures in a database.
15. A DML is a language that enables users to access and manipulate data in a database.
16. A Select is a part of DML involving information retrieval only.
17. A popular data manipulation language is SQL.
18. Tables are the basic building blocks of a database.
19. There are three types of Relationships in a table.
20. A form helps the user to systematically store information in the database.
B. Subjective Questions
1. In how many ways tables can be created in Base?
Ans. Tables can be created in two ways.
1. In Design view
2. Using Wizard
2. List datatypes available in Numeric Datatype?

Ans. The different types of numeric data types are:
Boolean Numeric
Tinyint Decimal
Smallint Real
Integer Float
Bigint Double
3. List datatypes available in Alphanumeric Data Type?

Ans. The different types of Alphanumeric Data Type are:
 Longvarchar
 Char
 Varchar
 Varchar_Ignore Case
4. Define the structure of a table.

Ans. A table is a set of data elements (values) that is organized in vertical columns and horizontal
rows. A table has a defined number of columns, but can have any number of rows.

5. Differentiate between Tuples and Attributes of a table
Ans. A row also called a Record or Tuple represents a single, data item in a table. Whereas A
column is a set of data values of a particular simple type, one for each row of the table.
6. Name different Binary data types.

Ans. The different Binary data types are:
 Longvarbinary
 Binary
 Varbinary
7. How many types of relationships can be created in Base? Explain each of them.
Ans. There are three types of relationship in OpenOffice Base.
 ONE to ONE: In this relationship, both the tables must have primary key columns. Example: In
the given tables EMP and DEPT, EMP_ID in EMP table and DEPT_ID in DEPT table are the
primary keys.
 ONE to MANY: In this relationship, one of the table must have primary key column. It signifies
that one column of primary key table is associated with all the columns of associated table.
 MANY to MANY: In this relationship, no table has the primary key column. It signifies that all
the columns of primary key table are associated with all the columns of associated table.
8. What do you mean by Sorting? In how many ways it can be done?

Ans. Sorting means arranging elements in particular sequence. It can be done in two ways.
 Increasing order
 Decreasing Order
1. What is the purpose of a form in a database?

a. Form is systematic way of storing information into the table.
b. Form is used to display information.
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: a. Form is systematic way of storing information into the table.
2. Which SQL command will increase the salary of all employees by 5000? (Table name is emp and
column name is salary).
a. UPDATE emp SET sal = salary + 5000;
b. UPDATE SET sal = salary + 5000;
c. UPDATE emp SET salary = 5000;
Ans: a. UPDATE emp SET sal = salary + 5000;
3. What is the purpose of the SQL query: SELECT * FROM Stud ORDER BY Rollno ASC; ?
a. Display all record in ascending order followed by Rollno
b. To display all the records of the table.
c. Both of the above.
Ans: a. Display all record in ascending order followed by Rollno
4. What does DML stand for?

a. Database Manipulation Language
b. Data Modification Language
c. Data Manipulation Language
Ans: a. Data Manipulation Language
5. What does SQL stand for?

a. Structured Query Language
b. Structured Quality Language
c. Structural Query Language
Ans: b. Structured Query Language
6. Which language is used to extract/fetch data from a table?

a. HTML
b. MySQL
c. OOBase
d. Python
Ans: b. MySQL
7. In Base, how can data be linked between two or more tables?

a. Foreign key
b. Primary key
c. Both a) and b)
8. In which view can the structure of a table be changed?

a. Design view
b. Structure view
c. Data view
d. All of the above
Ans: a. Design view
9. What data type is the Auto Value property used for?

a. Date
b. Character
c. Numeric
d. Binary
Ans: c. Numeric
10. Which data type is appropriate for storing information such as salary, fees, and price?
a. Binary data type
b. Alphanumeric data type
c. Date Time
d. Numerical data type
Ans: d. Numerical data type
11. In what ways can a table be created?

a. Using a Wizard
b. Using design view
c. Both a) and b)
12. What kind of field is a primary key?
a. Duplicate Data
b. Unique Data
c. Any Data
Ans: b. Unique Data
13. Does data integrity mean that data is accurate and consistent in the database?
a. Yes
b. No
Ans: a. Yes
14. Which of the following is not a database program?

a. MySQL
b. Writer
c. Oracle
d. OpenOffice base
Ans: b. Writer
15. What is a database?

a. A collection of attributes
b. A collection of field
c. An organized collection of data
Ans: c. An organized collection of data
16. Which field in the Student table can act as the primary key?
a. Roll_No
b. Fee
c. Student_name
d. Marks
Ans: a. Roll_No
17. Is Open Office base an open source software?

a. True
b. False
Ans: b. False
18. What is the default name of a table?

a. 1 Table
b. Table 1
c. Untitled 1
d. Tab 1
Ans: b. Table 1
19. Which of the following data types will occupy more space in computer memory?
a. Bigint
b. Smallint
c. Tinyint
d. Integer
Ans: a. Bigint

20. In which view can data be entered in a table?
a. Data view
b. Datasheet view
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: b. Datasheet view
21. Can relationships be created between _________ tables in Base?

a. One table only
b. Two or more tables
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: b. Two or more tables
22. Are queries commands that are used to define the structure and modify the data in a table?
a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
23. Which SQL query will retrieve the details of all students whose favorite color is blue?
a. SELECT all FROM Stud WHERE fav_Color = Blue ;
b. SELECT all FROM Stud WHERE fav_Color is Blue ;
c. SELECT name FROM Stud WHERE fav_Color = Blue ;
d. SELECT * FROM Stud WHERE fav_Color = Blue ;
Ans: d. SELECT * FROM Stud WHERE fav_Color = Blue ;
24. By default, data is arranged in _____ order using the ORDER BY clause.
a. Descending
b. Ascending
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: b. Ascending.
26. Which of the following is NOT a SQL command?

a. DELETE
b. UPDATE
c. SELECT
d. CREATE
Ans: d. CREATE
27. What is a foreign key?

a. A key that can contain null values
b. A key that can contain Zero
c. A key that references another table s primary key
d. A key that uniquely identifies in table
Ans: c. A key that references another table s primary key
28. Which of the following field properties is for the Numeric data type in Base?
a. Default Value
b. AutoValue
c. Length
d. All of the above
29. What is the default length of the Integer data type in Base?
a. 20
b. 40
c. 10
d. 50
Ans: c. 10
30. We can create a relationship between any two tables by selecting which option from the which
menu?
a. Relationships
b. Filter
c. Sort
d. All of the above
Ans: a. Relationships
31. In which relationship, both the tables must have primary key columns?
a. One to Many
b. One to One
c. Many to Many
d. Many to All
Ans: b. One to One
32. What are the commands that define the data structure and manipulate the data in a database?
a. Reports
b. Queries
c. Forms
d. Tables
Ans: b. Queries
33. Which operators are used to perform simple calculations in Base?

a. Arithmetic Operators
b. Membership Operators
c. Logical Operators
d. Relational Operators
Ans: a. Arithmetic Operators
34. Can Where and Order by clauses be used together in a single query?
a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
35. What is the purpose of the Update command in a database?

a. It is used to modify the data of the table.
b. It is used to delete the table.
c. It is used to modify the structure of the table.
d. It is used to insert data in the table.
Ans: a. It is used to modify the data of the table.
36. Which statement is used to remove one or more records from a database?
a. Erase
b. Delete
c. Remove
d. Del
Ans: b. Delete
37. Can we insert records into a table using a form in a database?

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
38. Which method is used to create a table step by step?

a. Use Wizard to Create Table
b. Create View
c. Create table in Design View
Ans: a. Use Wizard to Create Table
40. Which of the following is not a Date Time data type?

a. Date
b. Stamptime
c. Time
d. Timestamp
Ans: b. Stamptime
41. Binary data types are used for storing data in _________________ formats.
a. image
b. sound
c. boolean
d. binary
Ans: d. binary
42. Which of the following is not a category of Open Office data types?
a. Alphanumeric Types
b. Date time
c. Numeric Types
d. Bool Type
Ans: d. Bool Type
43. Which feature helps us get summarized data in a database?

a. Form
b. Query
c. Report
d. Table
Ans: c. Report
44. Which database feature helps users to systematically store information in a table?
a. Table
b. Report
c. Form
d. Query
Ans: c. Form
45. Rajesh wants to display the salary of all the employees after incrementing it by twice the amount
of the present salary. Which query will help her achieve this task?
a. Select salary + 2 from employee;
b. Select salary / 2 from employee;
c. Select salary 2 from employee;
d. Select salary * 2 from employee;
Ans: d. Select salary * 2 from employee;
46. Which feature is used to collect specific information from the pool of data?
a. Form
b. Query
c. Table
d. Report
Ans: b. Query
47. Which of the following relationships cannot be created in Open Office Base?
a. One to Many
b. Many to Many
c. One to One
d. Many to All
Ans: d. Many to All
48. Which property helps to set the value that is automatically inserted in a field when a new record is
created?
a. Length
b. Entry Required
c. Format
d. Default Value
Ans: d. Default Value
49. Which field property in Base can be used to automatically increment the value of a field?
a. Format
b. Length
c. Auto Value
d. Default Value
Ans: c. Auto Value
50. In which view can data be entered in a table in Base?

a. Datasheet View
b. Design View
Ans: a. Datasheet View
51. Which of the following is NOT a component of a database management system?

a. Data warehouse
b. Query language
c. Data dictionary
d. Database engine
Ans: a. Data warehouse
52. Which of the following is NOT a join type in SQL?

a. Outer join
b. Full join
c. Inner join
d. Circular join
Ans: d. Circular join
53. Which element in a table contains data of the same data type?
a. Column
b. Tuple
c. Record
d. All of the above
Ans: a. Column
54. A table has a fixed number of ________ but can have any number of ________
a. tuple, columns
b. columns, rows
c. rows, columns
d. tuple, degree
Ans: b. columns, rows
55. Which of the following acts as an interface to view, enter and change data in a database?
a. Report
b. Form
c. Table
d. Query
Ans: b. Form.
56. Which SQL command is used to delete data from a table?

a. INSERT
b. REMOVE
c. SELECT
d. DELETE
Ans: d. DELETE
57. Which is the most common DML command?

a. Delete
b. Select
c. Update
d. All of the above
Ans: b. Select
58. Which software is appropriate for storing data about school students?
a. Calc
b. MS-Access
c. Writer
d. Impress
Ans: b. MS-Access
59. What kind of data storage system stores data in a single table?
a. Only File
b. Relational
c. One File
d. Flat File
Ans: d. Flat File
60. What kind of computer holds the actual databases and runs only DBMS and related software?
a. Database Server
b. Web Server
c. SMPT Server
d. POP Server
Ans: a. Database Server
61. What is the role of the database server in relation to the GUI?
a. Back End
b. Front End
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: a. Back End
62. What is duplication of data called?

a. Redundancy
b. Consistency
c. Foreign Key
d. Inconsistency
Ans: b. Redundancy
63. Which of the following is not an advantage of a database?

a. Increasing Data Inconsistency
b. Increasing Data Redundancy
c. Data Security
d. Sharing of Data
Ans: a. Increasing Data Inconsistency
64. Can a database have only one table?

a. Yes
b. No
Ans: b. No
65. Which of the following is used to maintain unique records in a table?

a. Composite Key
b. Primary Key
c. Alternate Key
d. Foreign Key
Ans: b. Primary Key
66. What is a primary key made up of two or more columns called?

a. Composite Primary Key
b. Alternate Primary Key
c. Foreign Primary Key
d. Reference Primary Key
Ans: a. Composite Primary Key
67. Can duplicate values be entered in a primary key?

a. Yes
b. No
Ans: b. No
68. What is a key that refers to the primary key of another table called?
a. Alternate Primary Key
b. Foreign Key
c. Primary Key
d. Alternate Key
Ans: b. Foreign Key
69. What kind of database software is required when data is stored, maintained, and retrieved from
multiple tables?
a. SpreadSheet
b. RDBMS
c. DBMS
d. All of the above
Ans: b. RDBMS
70. Does every row in a table have the same structure?

a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
71. What are the basic building blocks of a database?

a. Records
b. Tables
c. Fields
d. All of the above
Ans: b. Tables
72. What is the default data type of fields?

a. Int
b. Text[Memo]
c. Memo
d. Text[Varchar]
Ans: d. Text[Varchar]
73. Does Base automatically add a column as Primary Key if none is added?
a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
74. What is the default length of the Varchar data type?

a. 10
b. 30
c. 50
d. 20
Ans: c. 50
75. What is used to identify the type of data that will be stored in a database?
a. Field
b. Data type
c. Table
d. Record
Ans: b. Data type
76. Which of the following is not a numerical data type?

a. Varchar
b. Tinyint
c. Boolean
d. Smallint
Ans: a. Varchar
77. Which of the following data types cannot store decimal values?
a. Boolean
b. Decimal
c. Numeric
d. Real
Ans: a. Boolean
78. Which data type is used for storing photos, music files, and other binary data?
a. Numeric
b. Varchar
c. Binary
d. Alphanumeric
Ans: c. Binary
79. Is Char a fixed-length data type and Varchar a variable-length data type?
a. Yes
b. No
Ans: a. Yes
80. What operations can be performed on data in a table?

a. Insert
b. Delete
c. Modify
d. All of the above
81. After inserting records in a table, can the structure of the table be modified?
a. True
b. False
Ans: b. False
82. What does sorting mean?

a. Arranging data in decreasing order
b. Arranging data in increasing order
c. Both a) and b)
83. Is Referential Integrity used to maintain accuracy and consistency of data in a relationship?
a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
84. From which menu a relationship can be created in Base?

a. View
b. Tools
c. Insert
d. Windows
Ans: b. Tools
85. How many types of relationships can be created between tables in Base?
a. Four
b. Five
c. Three
d. Two
Ans: c. Three
86. In Open Office Base, in which view can a query be created?

a. Using wizard
b. Design view
c. Both a) and b)
87. Can data be deleted using queries in Base?

a. True
b. False
Ans: b. False
88. Which statement is used to retrieve data from a table?

a. Print
b. Select
c. Delete
d. Update
Ans: b. Select
89. What is the purpose of the SQL query: SELECT empname, salary * 3 FROM emp; ?
a. Display only name and salary
b. It will give an error.
c. Display empname and three times of the salary of all employees.
Ans: c. Display empname and three times of the salary of all employees.
90. Which SQL command is used to modify data in a table?

a. SELECT
b. MODIFY
c. DELETE
d. UPDATE
Ans: d. UPDATE
91. Which of the following SQL commands are considered as DML commands?
a. UPDATE
b. DELETE
c. INSERT
d. All of the above.
Ans: d. All of the above.
92. What is another name for a tuple in a table?

a. Record
b. Column
d. Attribute
Ans: a. Record
93. Which element in a table represents a single data item?

a. Rows
b. Attribute
c. Columns
d. Field
Ans: c. Columns
94. Which of the following is NOT a standard SQL data type?

a. Float
b. Boolean
c. Integer
d. String
Ans: b. Boolean
95. Which of the following is NOT a function of a database management system?

a. Data retrieval
b. Data manipulation
c. Data storage
d. Data transmission
Ans: d. Data transmission
96. Which of the following is NOT a type of data manipulation language (DML)?
a. SELECT
b. UPDATE
c. INSERT
d. DELETE
Ans: a. SELECT
97. What can you do with data in a table created in Base?

a. Modify it
b. Insert it
c. Delete it
d. All of the above
98. In which view can the structure of a table be changed in Base?

a. Design View
b. Datasheet View
Ans: a. Design View
99. Which field property in Base can be used to store data in a specific format, such as a phone
number?
a. Auto Value
b. Length
c. Default Value
d. Format
Ans: d. Format
100. What is the default value of the field property Entry Required in Base?
a. Yes
b. No
Ans: b. No
101. To arrange the data in ascending or descending order, first select the column(s) and then click on
which button?
a. View
b. Save
c. Arrange
d. Sort
Ans: d. Sort
102. When a primary key from one table appears in another table, it is called a ________.
a. Composite Primary Key
b. Secondary Key
c. Foreign Key
d. Main Key
Ans: c. Foreign Key
103. In which relationship, one of the table must have primary key column?
a. One to Many
b. One to One
c. Many to Many
d. Many to All
Ans: a. One to Many
104. Once the relationships applied on the tables cannot be removed.

a. True
b. False
Ans: b. False
105. To remove the relationship between tables, right-click on the relationship thread and select
which option?
a. Delete
b. Remove
c. Edit
d. Clear
Ans: a. Delete
106. Which language is used to write a query in Open Office Base?

a. VB
b. SQL
c. C
d. Python
Ans: b. SQL
107. Which command is used to retrieve data from a table?

a. Delete
b. Create
c. Select
d. Insert
Ans: c. Select

108. Can SELECT statement retrieve data from multiple tables?
a. True
b. False
Ans: a. True
109. Rajesh wants to display all the records from the table student .
a. Select * student;
b. Select # from student;
c. Select from student;
d. Select * from student;
Ans: d. Select * from student;
110. Which clause can be used with the SELECT SQL command to display records containing the
same type of values?
a. Order By
b. Where
c. Both a and b
Ans: b. Where
111. Which commands are used to add, modify, and delete records in a database table?
a. Insert, Update, and Remove
b. Insert, Update, and Delete
c. Insert, Modify, and Delete
d. Add, Update, and Delete
Ans: b. Insert, Update, and Delete
112. By default, in which order is data arranged using the ORDER BY clause in a database?
a. Decreasing
b. Alphabetical
c. Increasing
d. Descending
Ans: c. Increasing
113. Which clause of the SELECT statement helps to display specific data in a database?
a. Where
b. Between
c. Order By
Ans: a. Where
114. What is the name of the interface in a user-specified layout that lets users view, enter, and
change data directly in database objects such as tables?
a. Query
b. Form
c. Report
d. Table
Ans: b. Form
115. Aman created an object X in Base to store the value in the form of rows and columns. What is
X?
a. Table
b. Row
c. Column
d. Database
Ans: a. Table
116. Which of the following contains data of the same data type?
a. Record
b. Tuple
c. Column
d. All of the above
Ans: c. Column
117. Give an example of an open-source RDBMS.

a. Microsoft SQL Server
b. Microsoft Access
c. Oracle
d. OpenOffice Base
Ans: d. OpenOffice Base
118. What is the default length of the TINYINT data type?

a. 1
b. 2
c. 3
d. 4
Ans: c. 3
119. Which data type can store character/data up to the length specified by the user?
a. Varchar
b. Char
c. Varchar_IgnoreCase
d. All of the above
120. Dhriti wants to store the details of students as well as their pictures in a table named school .
Which data type is suitable for storing pictures?
a. Boolean
b. Binary
c. Memo
d. Varchar
Ans: b. Binary
121. Which data type stores hours, minutes, and second information?
a. Date
b. Time
c. Stamptime
d. Timer
Ans: b. Time
1. A _________ is an organized collection of data.

a. Database
b. Digital Document
c. Spreadsheet
Ans: a. Database
2. A ________ is a software package that can be used for creating and managing databases.
a. Database Management System
b. Basedata Management System
c. Database Manage System
Ans: a. Database Management System
3. A_________________ database management system is referred to as a relational model.

a. DBMS
b. RDBMS
c. DB
Ans: b. RDBMS
4. Example of the database ________.

a. Microsoft Access
b. OpenOffice Base
c. MySQL
d. All of the above
5. The database concept has evolved since the _______.

a. 1980
b. 1960
c. 1955
d. 1950
Ans: b. 1960
6. DBMS Stands for __________.

a. Database Management System
b. Database Manage System
c. Data Manage System
Ans: a. Database Management System
7. A database management system is a software package with computer programs that controls the
___________.
a. Creation
b. Maintenance
c. Use of Database
d. All of the above
8. A database is an integrated collection of ___________.

a. Data records
b. Files
c. Objects
d. All of the above

9. A DBMS enables several user application programs to access the ________ database.
a. Other Database
b. Same Database
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: b. Same Database
10. Data can be organized into __________.

a. Flat File
b. Relational
c. Both a) and b)
11. Data stored in a single table is known as __________.

a. Flat File
b. Relational
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: a. Flat File
12. Data is stored in multiple tables, which are connected together via a common field.
a. Flat File
b. Relational
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: b. Relational
13. __________ are dedicated computers that hold the actual databases and run only the DBMS and
related software.
a. Database Server
b. Decided Server
c. Web Server
Ans: a. Database Server
14. What are the advantages of database __________.

a. Reduces Data Redundancy
b. Sharing of Data
c. Data Integrity
d. All of the above
15. When the same piece of data is stored in two or more locations, it is called ______________.
a. Data Redundancy
b. Data Integrity
c. Data Consistency
Ans: a. Data Redundancy
16. _________ prevents creating multiple copies in the database.

a. Data Redundancy
b. Data Integrity
c. Data Consistency
Ans: a. Data Redundancy
17. __________ means that the data is accurate and consistent in the database.
a. Data Redundancy
b. Data Integrity
c. Data Consistency
Ans: b. Data Integrity
18. Only authorized users should be allowed to access the database and their identity should be
authenticated using a username and password known as ________.
a. Data Redundancy
b. Data Consistency
c. Data Security
Ans: c. Data Security
19. Database Management System automatically takes care of ____________.

a. Data Redundancy
b. Backup and Recovery
c. Data Security
Ans: b. Backup and Recovery
20. ___________ prevent multiple mismatching copies of the same data in the database and only
valid data will be added in the database.
a. Data Redundancy
b. Backup and Recovery
c. Data Consistency
Ans: c. Data Consistency
21. __________ in a table represents a set of information with the same structure in every row.
a. Tuples
b. Record
c. Both a) and b)
22. A __________ is the actual text, number, or date that you enter when adding data to your
database.
a. Values
b. Table
c. Boolean
Ans: a. Values
23. The unique field present in the table is called __________.

a. Primary Key
b. Candidate Key
c. Foreign Key
Ans: a. Primary Key
24. When the primary key is applied on multiple columns is known as __________.
a. Primary Key
b. Composite Primary Key
c. Foreign Key
Ans: b. Composite Primary Key
25. By default if the primary key is not defined that column is known as __________.
a. Primary Key
b. Candidate Key
c. Foreign Key
Ans: c. Foreign Key
26. __________ key can store multiple same records in the table.
a. Primary Key
b. Candidate Key
c. Foreign Key
Ans: c. Foreign Key
27. The relationship between two tables where one table has one record and another table has many
records is known as ___________.
a. One-to-Many
b. Many-to-Many
c. Many-to-One
Ans: a. One-to-Many
28. SQL stands for _____________.

a. Single Query Language
b. Structured Query Language
c. Semantic Query Language
Ans: b. Structured Query Language
29. A ____________ is a collection of data components organized in the form of vertical columns
and horizontal rows.
a. Table
b. Fields
c. Attributes
Ans: a. Table
30. A row also called a Record or _________ represents a single, data item in a table.
a. Column
b. Tuples
c. Fields
Ans: b. Tuples
31. You can create tables in the database using _________.
a. Wizard
b. SQL
c. Both a) and b)
32. ____________ are the basic building blocks of a database.

a. Table
b. Query
c. Database
Ans: a. Table
33. _____________ are used to define the type of data that will be stored in the database.
a. Data Types
b. Data field
c. Key Data
Ans: a. Data Types
34. What are the different types of data type available in OpenOffice base?
a. Numeric Types
b. Alphanumeric Types
c. Binary Types & Date time
d. All of the above
35. __________ types are used for describing numeric values for the field used in the table of a
database.
a. Numeric Type
b. Alphanumeric Type
c. Boolean Type
d. Date & Time
Ans: a. Numeric Type
36. ___________ data type can store 0 or 1 in the database.

a. Boolean
b. TinyInt
c. Smalint
d. BigInt
Ans: a. Boolean
37. What are the different numerical data types?

a. Boolean
b. Tinyint & Smallint
c. Integer & Bigint
d. All of the above
38. ____________ data type can store UTF 8 Characters in the database.
a. Longvarchar
b. Char
c. Both a) and b)
39. __________ is case sensitive data type in the database.

a. Longvarchar
b. Varchar_Ignorecase
c. Varchar
d. All of the above
Ans: b. Varchar_Ignorecase
40. ___________ data types in a database can be used for storing photos, music, video or any file
format.
a. Numerical Type
b. Alphanumeric Type
c. Binary Type
d. Date & Time
Ans: c. Binary Type
41. Which datatype is used for storing date and time both in the database.
a. Date
b. Time
c. Timestamp
Ans: c. Timestamp
42. A table is a collection of data elements that are organized using a vertical __________ and
horizontal ___________ model.
a. Column & Row
b. Row & Column
c. Column & Column
d. Row & Row
Ans: a. Column & Row
43. A ________ is a collection of data values of a specific type, one for each row of a table.
a. Column
b. Row
c. Cell
Ans: a. Column
44. In a table, a __________ represents a single data item.

a. Row
b. Truple
c. Both a) and b)
45. _____________ are used to identify which type of data we are going to store in the database.
a. Datatype
b. DataItem
c. DataValue
d. DataCat
Ans: a. Datatype
46. There are ________ ways to create a table.

a. 1
b. 2
c. 3
d. 4
Ans: b. 2
47. Field properties can be set in both the ________ and _________ .
a. Length & Default Value
b. Length & Entry
c. Both a) and b)
d. All of the above
48. By default the length of the numerical data type is _______.

a. 05
b. 10
c. 20
d. 30
Ans: b. 10
49. If the user does not specify a value for a field while putting values into the table, a
_____________ value can be assigned to it.
a. Default Value
b. Length
c. Format
Ans: a. Default Value
50. ________ means to arrange the data in either ascending order or descending order.
a. Filter
b. Sorting
c. Arrangement
Ans: b. Sorting
51. ____________ is used to maintain accuracy and consistency of data in a relationship.

a. Referential data
b. Referential Integrity
c. Referential Value
Ans: b. Referential Integrity
52. In base, data can be linked between two or more tables with the help of ____________.
a. Primary Key
b. Foreign Key
c. Both a) and b)

53. Referential Integrity helps to avoid ____________.
a. If you want to add a record in the related table and if there is no associated record available in the
primary key table.
b. Changing values in a primary if there are any dependent records in the related table.
c. Deleting records from a primary key table if there are any matching related records available in the
associated table.
d. All of the above
54. The connection or association between two or more table is known as ____________
a. Connection
b. Relationship
c. Connector
Ans: b. Relationship
55. Relationships between tables help to __________.

a. Save time
b. Reduce data-entry errors
c. Summarize data from related tables
d. All of the above
56. What are the different types of relationships which can be created in table___________.
a. One to One
b. One to Many or Many to One
c. Many to Many
d. All of the above
57. ___________ is the relationship, where both the tables must have primary key columns.
a. One to One
c. Many to Many
d. All of the above
Ans: a. One to One
58. ____________ in this relationship, one of them must have a primary key column.
a. One to One
c. Many to Many
d. All of the above
Ans: b. One to Many or Many to One
59. A ____________________ is a standard for commands that define the different structures in a
database.
a. Data Manipulation Language (DML)
b. Data Definition Language (DDL)
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: b. Data Definition Language (DDL)
60. A ______________ is a language that enables users to access and manipulate data in a database.
a. Data Manipulation Language (DML)
b. Data Definition Language (DDL)
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: a. Data Manipulation Language (DML)
61. A ____________ is a subset of DML that just deals with information retrieval.
a. Query Language
b. Structure Language
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: a. Query Language
62. A popular data manipulation language is _________________.

a. Structured Query Language
b. Machine Level language
c. Low level language
Ans: a. Structured Query Language
63. There are __________ types of Relationships in a table.

a. 2
b. 3
c. 4
d. 5
Ans: b. 3
64. _________ means that the query hides certain data and displays only what you want to see based
on the criteria you provided.
a. Filtering
b. Sort
c. Query
d. All of the above
Ans: a. Filtering
65. A __________ statement used to display the zero record or multiple record from the database.
a. Select
b. Order By
c. Where
Ans: a. Select
66. To retrieve all the columns in a table the syntax is ___________.

a. Select $ from <tablename>;
b. Select * <tablename>;
c. Select * from <tablename>;
d. Select % <tablename>;
Ans: c. Select * from <tablename>;
67. To display the records containing the same type of values _________ clause can be used with the
Select SQL Command.
a. Where
b. More
c. Order
Ans: a. Where
68. Shortcut key for executing query in OpenOffice base.

a. F2
b. F3
c. F4
d. F5
Ans: d. F5
69. To view records in ascending order from a database.

a. Unorder by
b. Order by
c. Acc by
d. Decc by
Ans: b. Order by
70. ___________ statement is used for modifying records in a database.

a. Modify
b. Update
c. Delete
d. Select
Ans: b. Update
71. The syntax of the update statement is _____________.

a. Update <tablename> set <columnname = value> where <condition>;
b. Update <tablename> set <condition> where <condition>;
c. Modify <tablename> set < value> where <condition>;
d. Modify <tablename> set <columnname = value> where <condition>;
Ans: a. Update <tablename> set <columnname = value> where <condition>;
72. A _______ helps the user to systematically store information in the database.
a. Form
b. Table
c. Report
Ans: a. Form
73. A ________ enables users to view, enter, and change data directly in database objects such as
tables.
a. Table
b. Form
c. Report
Ans: b. Form
74. _________ statement retrieves zero or more rows from one or more database tables or database
views.
a. Select
b. Update
c. Delete
Ans: a. Select
75. By default, data is arranged in _______ order using ORDER BY clause.

a. Ascending
b. Descending
c. Both a) and b)
Ans:
a. Ascending
76. __________ statement is used for modifying records in a database.
a. Select
b. Update
c. Delete
Ans: b. Update
77. To remove one or more records from a database, use the _________ statement.
a. Select
b. Update
c. Delete
Ans:
c. Delete
Session 5: Create Forms and Reports using Wizard
78. A __________ provides the user a systematic way of storing information into the database.
a. Query
b. Form
c. Table
Ans: b. Form
79. __________ will help you to display summarized data from the database.
a. Report
b. Form
c. Table
Ans: a. Report
80. To create a form you need to select the _________ option available under the Database section.
a. Form
b. Query
c. Report
d. All of the above
Ans: a. Form
81. A ______ helps to collect specific information from the pool of data in the database.
a. Form
b. Query
c. Report
d. All of the above
Ans: b. Query
82. ________ is used to display the summary of data.

a. Form
b. Query
c. Report
d. All of the above
Ans: c. Report
83. _________ are the interfaces with which the user interacts.
a. Form
b. Query
c. Report
d. All of the above
Ans: a. Form
84. Data from multiple tables can be stored in _______.

a. Data system
b. Database
c. Datatype
Ans: b. Database
85. Which data type is suitable for storing values for date of birth field?
a. Time
b. Date
d. Timestamp
Ans: b. Date
86. Which data type is most suitable for storing a very large amount of data?
a. LongVarchar or Memo
b. Char
c. Varchar
d. Varchar_IgnoreCase
Ans:
a. LongVarchar or Memo
87. Identify the odd one out.
a. Binary Types
b. Date & Day Type
c. Numeric Types
d. Alphanumeric Types
Ans: b. Date & Day Type
88. What does a single data item in a table represent?

a. Columns
b. Attribute
c. Rows
d. Field
Ans: c. Rows
89. Which toolbar helps us move from one record to another in a form in a database?
a. Formatting Toolbar
b. Image Toolbar
c. Standard Toolbar
d. Form Navigation Toolbar
Ans: d. Form Navigation Toolbar
90. What is the correct query to increase the salary of all employees by Rs.10000 in a table named
Employee with a column name of Salary?
a. Update Employee set Salary = Salary + 10000;
b. Update * Employee set Salary = Salary + 10000.
c. Update table Employee set Salary = Salary + 10000;
d. Update table Employee set Salary = 10000;
Ans: a. Update Employee set Salary = Salary + 10000;
91. Which query will display the details of all the students in increasing order of Roll number?
a. Select * from student order by Rollno ;
b. Select * student order by Rollno ;
c. Select all from student order by Rollno ;
d. Select * from student orderby Rollno ;
Ans: a. Select * from student order by Rollno ;
92. Which clauses can be used with the SELECT statement?

a. Order by Clause
b. Where clause
c. Both a) and b)
Ans:
c. Both a) and b)
93. In which relationship, no table has the primary key column?
a. Many to One
b. One to One
c. Many to Many
d. One to Many
Ans: c. Many to Many
94. Referential integrity refers to the _______________ between tables.

a. communication
b. consistency
c. relationship
d. joining
Ans: c. relationship
95. Which field property in Base must be set to Yes in order to require a value to be entered in a
field?
a. Entry Required
b. Auto Value
c. Format
d. Length
Ans:
a. Entry Required
96. In which view can field properties be set in Base?
a. Design View
b. Datasheet View
Ans: a. Design View
97. Which of the following is a benefit of using a database management system?

a. Improved data security
b. Improved data accessibility
c. Improved data consistency
d. All of the above
98. Which of the following is NOT a type of database model?

a. Relational
b. Object-oriented
c. Hierarchical
d. Procedural
Ans: d. Procedural
99. Which of the following is an example of an open-source RDBMS?

a. Oracle
b. Microsoft Access
c. OpenOffice Base
d. Microsoft SQL Server
Ans: c. OpenOffice Base
100. What is the purpose of a report in a database?

a. Report is used to display information.
b. Report is systematic way of storing information into the table.
c. Both a) and b)
Ans: a. Report is used to display information.
1. What is database? Give an example. What does DBMS stand for?

Ans. A collection of related information organised as tables is known as database e.g. INGRES,
MySQL etc. DBMS stands for DataBase Management System. It is a computer-based record
keeping system.
2. What is the difference between Rows and Columns in a table?

Ans. In a table, rows are called records and columns are termed a fields. A row stores complete
information of a record whereas column stores only similar data values for all records.
3. What is field in database? Give an example.

Ans. A field is an area, reserved for a specific piece of data. It is also known as attribute. e.g.
Customer Name.
4. Define forms and what is the need of using them?

Ans. A form is a window or screen that contains numerous fields or spaces to enter data. Forms
can be used to view and edit your data. It is an interface in user specified layout.

5. What does RDBMS stand for?
Ans. RDBMS stands for Relational Database Management System. It is a type of DBMS that
stores data in the form of relations (tables).
6. How is data organized in a RDBMS?
Ans. A relational database is a type of database. It uses a structure that allows us to identify and
access datain relation to another piece of data in the database. Data in a relational database is
organized into tables.
7. Write the purpose of DBMS.
Ans. DBMS is used to store logically related information at a centralised location. It facilitates
data sharing among all the applications requiring it.
8. Write any two uses of database management system.
Ans. The two uses of database management system are as follows
(i) DBMS is used to store data at a centralised location.
(ii) It is used to minimise data redundancy and data inconsistency.
9. Write any two advantages of using database.
Ans. The two advantages of using database are as follows
(i) It can ensure data security.
(ii) It reduces the data redundancy.
10. Give any two disadvantages of the database.
Ans. The two disadiantages of the database are as follows
(i) A database system creates additional complexity and requirements.
(ii) A database system is a multi-user software, which is less efficient.
11. A table named School (containing data of students of the whole school) is created, where
each record consists of several fields including AdmissionNo (Admission Number), RollNo
(Roll Number), Name. Which field out of these three should be set as the primary key and
why?
Ans. AdmissionNo should be set as primary key because admission numbers are unique for each
and every students of the school, which is not possible in the case with RollNo and Name.
12. Why Memo data type is preferred over Text data type for a field?
Ans. When the length of the field is more than 255 characters. Text data type is not capable to
store the project description because its length cannot be more than 255 characters so, Memo data
type is preferred over Text data type.
13. What happens when text is entered in a Number type field?
Ans. When we enter text in a Number field and press Enter or press Tab key, it displays a
message that The value you entered does not match the Number data type in this column.
14. Damini is a programmer in an institute and is asked to handle the records containing
information of students. Suggest any 5 fields name and their data type of students database.
Ans.

15. Create a table of Student based on the following table instance.
Ans. CREATE TABLE STUDENT (ID Integer, Name varchar (15), Stream_Id Integer);
16. Write a SQL command to create the table BANK whose structure is given below.
Ans. The SQL command to create a table as per given structure is as follows Mysql> CREATE
TABLE BANK (ID Number integer (10) PRIMARY KEY, Name varchar (20), B date Date,
Address varchar (50));
17. List datatypes available in Numeric data type.

Ans. Datatypes available in numeric data type are TINYINT, SMALLCINT, MEDIUMINT, INT
and BIGINT.
18. Write one example of data field for which you would set the Required property to Yes.
Ans. In a table, when we declare a field as a primary key, then the field s Required property must
be set to yes because in a primary key field, we need to enter data always.
19. What is the purpose of Default Value field property?

Ans. If there is a situation when you want to enter same value for all records. Then, to avoid
typing the same thing many times, you can set as a Default Value property.
20. Insert some information into a table COLLEGE, whose structure is given below.
Ans. (i) Mysql>INSERT INTO COLLEGE (ROLL_NO, NAME, CLASS, BRANCH) VALUES
(2, VIKAS ,12, SCIENCE ); (ii) Mysql>INSERT INTO COLLEGE (ROLL_NO, NAME,
CLASS, BRANCH) VALUES (3, RAJ , 10, SCIENCE );
21. What is the value of Entry Required field?

Ans. The value of this property can be Yes or No. If entry required is Yes, the field cannot be
absent i.e. should be necessarily present with a value.
22. What is table? Also, define Candidate Key.

Ans. A table consists of a number of rows and columns. Each record contains values for the
attributes. A candidate key is the smallest subset of the super key for which there does not exist a
proper subset that is super key. Any candidate key can be choosen to uniquely identify the
records, it is called primary key.
23. What is Data Control Language?

Ans. Data Control Language is used to create roles, permissions, and referential integrity as well
it is used to control access to the database by securing it. These SQL commands are used for
providing security to database objects. These commands are GRANT and REVOKE.
24. What is Data Transaction Control Language?

Ans. Transaction control commands manage changes made by DML commands. These SQL
commands are used for managing changes affecting the data. These commands are COMMIT,
ROLLBACK, and SAVEPOINT.
25. Describe any four major problems associated with sustainable development.
Ans. Four problems associated with sustained development are as follows
(i) The concept of sustainable development is subject to criticism. What, exactly, is to be
sustained in a sustainable development? Any positive rate of exploitation of a non-renewable
resource will eventually lead to exhaustion of Earth s final stock.
(ii) Turning the concept of sustainability into policy raises questions about how to assess the well-
being of present and future generations. The issue is more complicated because our children do
not just inherit environmental pollution and resource depletion, but also enjoy the fruits of our
labour, in the forms of education, skills, and knowledge (i.e. human capital), as well as physical
capital.
(iii) Poor management of natural resources, combined with growing economic activities, will
continue to pose serious challenges to environment. The problem arises because people,
institutions and governments have failed to evolve mechanism and policies to strike a balance
between development and conservation of resources and preservation of environment.
(iv) The commonly held view that greater economic activity necessarily hurts the environment, is
based on static assumptions about technology, tastes and environmental investments. In reality,
the relationships between inputs and outputs and the overall effects of economic activities on the
environment, are continually changing.
26. Mention the main principles of sustainable development.

Ans. Main principles of sustainable development are
(i) Respect and care for all forms of life.
(ii) Improving the quality of human life.
(iii) Minimising the depletion of natural resources.
(iv) Conserving the Earth s vitality and diversity.
(v) Enabling communities to care for their own environment.
(vi) Changing personal attitude and practices towards the environment.
27. Why is it important to adopt sustainable development? Explain.

Ans. A three-year study using satellites and aerial photography undertaken by the United Nations
long ago warned that the environment had deteriorated so badly that it was critical in many of
eighty-eight countries, investigated. In view of all these findings and problems, sustainable
development acquires much importance.
Nature and mankind live and die together.

The Earth s vital signs reveal a patient in declining health. We need to realise our ethical and
moral obligations to the mother Earth. Human beings are caretakers of the planet and responsible
trustees of the legacy of future generations.
Due to the realisation of importance of sustainable development, now there is a transcending
concern for survival of the people and planet. We need to take a holistic view of the very basis of
our existence. The environmental problem does not necessarily signal our demise, rather it is our
passport for the future. To save ourselves and our future generations from catastrophe, we require
to take a holistic view, an ecological view, seeing the world as an integrated whole, rather than a
dissociated collection of parts.
28. Describe the meaning and importance of sustainable development.

Ans. Sustainable development refers to the process of economic development where resources are
used judiciously to satisfy needs of not only present generation but also to conserve them for the
use of future generations. Sustainable development takes place without depleting the present
natural resources.
The importance of sustainable development is discussed below
(i) It helps to conserve and make use of means and resources for the maximum benefit without
wastage.
(ii) It awares the people about the responsibility to use and preserve natural resources.
(iii) It creates the feeling that natural resources are the common property of all and nobody can
use the property according to his personal will. It helps to conserve natural and social
environment.
(iv) People s participation is to be given priority in development work in order to achieve the
aim of sustainable development.
(v) It attempts to create the concept of maintaining the present work for the future and conserving
natural resources for future generation.

1 14612 Class 10 IT Revision Notes and Que Ans

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1 14612 Class 10 IT Revision Notes and Que Ans

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1 14612 Class 10 IT Revision Notes and Que Ans

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SELF MANAGEMENT SKILLS II

SELF MANAGEMENT SKILLS

Always keep in mind the ABC of stress management

Ability to Work Independently

Prepared by: M. S. KumarSwamy, TGT(Maths) Page - 1 -

Some steps to manage emotional intelligence are as given below.

Prepared by: M. S. KumarSwamy, TGT(Maths) Page - 2 -

Difference between Interests and Abilities (Strengths)

Qualities of Self-motivated People

Prepared by: M. S. KumarSwamy, TGT(Maths) Page - 3 -

How to Set Goals?

Prepared by: M. S. KumarSwamy, TGT(Maths) Page - 4 -

Not a time bound goal: I want to lose 10 kg someday.

Time bound goal: I want to lose 10kg in the next 6 months.

TIME MANAGEMENT AND ITS IMPORTANCE

Four Steps for Effective Time Management Organise

Prepared by: M. S. KumarSwamy, TGT(Maths) Page - 5 -

1. Which of the following is not a self-management skill?

2. Grooming is a term associated with

3. What steps should one take to build confidence?

4. Which of the following is a quality of a self-confident person?

5. What is the best way to start our day positively?

7. What can you do to get rid of negative thoughts or feelings?

Prepared by: M. S. KumarSwamy, TGT(Maths) Page - 1 -

11. The following image is an example of _____ shirt.

12. The following image is an example of _____ T-shirt.

Prepared by: M. S. KumarSwamy, TGT(Maths) Page - 2 -

OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS (SET 02)

2. Self management is also useful in:

3. _____________ term is also referred to self management.

8. What is the reason for stress?

10. How can we manage stress?

11. What are the stress management techniques?

13. How many types of skills are there in emotional intelligence?

14. What are the steps to manage emotional intelligence?

16. How can you identify your strength?

17. How can you identify your weaknesses?

18. Identifying strengths

19. Identifying weaknesses

Prepared by: M. S. KumarSwamy, TGT(Maths) Page - 5 -

24. What are the different types of motivation?

25. What are the qualities of self-motivated people?

31. What different examples of time management?

OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS (SET 03)

1. Self-management is also referred to as __________.

4. Employers too strongly prefer people with good self-management skills.

11. ______ are the reason for stress?

12. Which of the following is not a stressor?

17. Stress has always had a bad effect.

20. ________ stress is an unavoidable part of one s life.

22. Which of the following is/are known as Stress Casual Agents ?

24. In the ABC of stress management, A stands for _____.

25. In the ABC of stress management, B stands for _____.

26. In the ABC of stress management, C stands for ___________.

Prepared by: M. S. KumarSwamy, TGT(Maths) Page - 10 -

28. Identify the Stress Casual Agents.

29. Identify the Stress Casual Agents.

30. Identify the Stress Casual Agent s.

31. Identify the Stress Casual Agent s.

Prepared by: M. S. KumarSwamy, TGT(Maths) Page - 11 -